JP2015097863A - Game system and game device - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent a game device from storing inappropriate game information in communication recovery when both of a game machine and the game device side store game information changing according to execution of a game.SOLUTION: In recovery processing in communication recovery, a first check is performed by comparing the number of game balls included in the last game board information transmitted from a Pachinko machine with the number of game balls stored by a CU to determine whether the number of game balls included in the last game board information is correct, and, after that, a twelfth check is performed by comparing the number of game balls included in the newest game board information transmitted from the Pachinko machine with the number of game balls stored by the CU to determine whether the number of game balls included in the newest game board information is correct.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming system including a gaming machine and a gaming device that enables gaming on the gaming machine, and the gaming device.

  Enclosed ball pachinko machines are known as gaming machines that can be played with game points and that are added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. In addition, as a gaming device that is connected to the gaming machine so as to be able to communicate with the gaming machine while using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming point is added using a card balance and an enclosed ball type A card unit that is communicably connected to a pachinko machine is known.

  Patent Document 1 describes an enclosed ball type gaming machine and a terminal device provided adjacent to the left side of such a conventional gaming machine and gaming device (see paragraph [Patent Document 1] 0019] [0022]).

  Similarly, Patent Document 2 describes an enclosed ball game machine and a ball lending machine (see paragraph [0086] of Patent Document 2).

  The game points used for the game are added by the occurrence of a winning or the withdrawal of the card balance, and subtracted by, for example, firing a pachinko ball. In this way, the number of game points that change in accordance with the game situation is conventionally managed by the gaming machine itself (see paragraphs [0079] and [0080] of Patent Document 2 and paragraphs [0043] and [0045] of Patent Document 1). ]reference).

  For example, in Patent Document 1, a gaming card in which the final number of balls is written is transmitted to the terminal device by the credit control device of the gaming machine transmitting the final number of balls to the terminal device in response to the end of the game. (See paragraph [0059] of Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-337371 JP 2006-254955 A

  By the way, the game point is important information that should be strictly managed from the viewpoint of preventing fraud. However, in the case of the ones described in Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 described above, the game score, which is the important information, is managed only on the gaming machine side, and there is an inconvenience that the management of the important information is insufficient. Arise.

  Therefore, in order to manage not only gaming machines, but also gaming devices such as card units, this game information, which is important information, is used in order from the gaming machine to the game score data, which is gaming information that fluctuates with the game. It is conceivable that the game score data that is transmitted to the device is stored and managed on the gaming device side as needed.

  However, in the case of such a configuration, when the communication between the gaming machine and the gaming device is temporarily interrupted due to power interruption or failure, the gaming machine side and the gaming device side There is a case where the number of game points stored in is different. One of the causes is, for example, when the game score is changing at any time on the gaming machine side during a game, a disconnection with the gaming device occurs and the change in the gaming score from the gaming machine to the gaming device is specified. It is assumed that the information to be transmitted is not transmitted, and that the number of game points changes only on the gaming machine side.

  Therefore, when communication is restored, the game device receives information specifying the number of game points sent from the gaming machine side, and based on the received information, the number of game points stored on the game device side is determined. It is conceivable to perform control to update to the correct one.

  However, in the case of such a configuration, for example, when an illegal act of transmitting a game number (game information) increased from the gaming machine to the gaming device more than the actual number at the time of communication restoration is performed, It is expected that there will be a disadvantage that the gaming device side stores an inappropriate number of game points (game information).

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to store game information that changes as a game is performed on both the gaming machine side and the gaming device side. It is to prevent the inconvenience that the gaming device stores improper gaming information at times.

(1) The present invention is a gaming system comprising a gaming machine (P 2 and S 2S) and a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Information transmitting means for transmitting game specifying information (game table information (the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls)) for specifying game information that changes as a game is played (FIG. 14). To FIG. 16, input / output interface of the payout control unit 171),
The game specification information before transmission that is the game specification information before transmission to the gaming device (the latest game table information (game table information being counted)) is stored and the game specification information transmitted to the game device is transmitted. Game specific information storage means (FIG. 5: RAM of the payout control unit 171) for storing already-played game specific information (previous game table information),
The gaming device is:
Information storage means for storing the game information (FIG. 5: RAM of the CU control unit 323);
Information update means (FIG. 5: CPU of the CU control unit 323) for updating information stored in the information storage means based on the game specifying information transmitted from the information transmission means,
The information transmitting means stores the pre-transmission game stored in the game specifying information storage means at the time of communication recovery after recovery from an incommunicable state where the gaming machine and the gaming device cannot communicate with each other. Including game specific information distinction transmitting means (see FIG. 15 and FIG. 16) for transmitting the specific information and the transmitted game specific information in a manner that the gaming device can distinguish,
The gaming device is:
Based on the pre-transmission game identification information, the transmitted game identification information, and the information stored in the information storage means transmitted by the game identification information distinction transmission means, the pre-transmission game identification information and the transmitted Suitability determining means (S301, S303, S311, S312, S323) for determining whether or not the game specifying information is appropriate information;
On the condition that it is determined to be appropriate by the suitability determining means, matching means (in S303) that matches the gaming machine and game information based on the pre-transmission game specifying information and the transmitted game specifying information. It further includes a RAM of the CU control unit 323 that stores the number of game balls received at the time of NO as a new number of game balls, S313).

  According to the above configuration, the pre-transmission game identification information sent from the gaming machine at the time of communication recovery, the transmitted game identification information, and the information stored in the gaming device side are compared, and the pre-transmission gaming machine identification information, It is determined whether or not the transmitted game identification information is appropriate information, and in order to ensure consistency between the gaming machine and the game information on the condition that it is determined to be appropriate. In addition, it is possible to prevent improper restoration processing of game information on the gaming device side based on the pre-transmission game specifying information and the transmitted game specifying information as much as possible.

  In addition, the game identification information sent from the gaming machine side at the time of communication restoration is the game identification information before transmission which is the game identification information before being transmitted to the gaming device and the game identification information transmitted to the gaming device. Since the game specific information is transmitted separately from the game specific information, the suitability of each game specific information can be individually determined as compared to the case where the game specific information is transmitted collectively together. Appropriate judgment results can be obtained by fine judgment.

(2) Another aspect of the present invention is a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on gaming machines (P 2 and S 2S),
Information storage means (FIG. 5: RAM of the CU control unit 323) for storing game information that changes when a game is played in the gaming machine;
Information receiving means (FIGS. 14 to 16, communication control IC 325a) for receiving game specifying information for specifying the game information from the gaming machine;
Information updating means (FIG. 5: CPU of the CU control unit 323) for updating information stored in the information storage means based on the game specifying information received by the information receiving means;
The information receiving means includes the pre-transmission game specifying information transmitted from the gaming machine as the game specifying information at the time of communication recovery after recovery from an incommunicable state where communication with the gaming machine is not possible, and the game machine Including game specific information distinction receiving means (see FIGS. 15 and 16) for receiving in a manner capable of distinguishing the transmitted game specific information which is the game specific information one time before the game specific information before transmission;
The gaming device is:
Based on the pre-transmission game specific information received by the game specific information distinction receiving means, the transmitted game specific information, and the information stored in the information storage means, the pre-transmission game specific information and the transmitted game. Suitability determination means (S301, S303, S311, S312, S323) for determining whether or not the specific information is appropriate information;
On the condition that it is determined to be appropriate by the suitability determining means, matching means (in S303) that matches the gaming machine and game information based on the pre-transmission game specifying information and the transmitted game specifying information. It further includes a RAM of the CU control unit 323 that stores the number of game balls received at the time of NO as a new number of game balls, S313).

  According to the above configuration, the pre-transmission game identification information sent from the gaming machine at the time of communication recovery, the transmitted game identification information, and the information stored in the gaming device side are compared, and the pre-transmission gaming machine identification information, It is determined whether or not the transmitted game identification information is appropriate information, and in order to ensure consistency between the gaming machine and the game information on the condition that it is determined to be appropriate. In addition, it is possible to prevent improper restoration processing of game information on the gaming device side based on the pre-transmission game specifying information and the transmitted game specifying information as much as possible.

  In addition, the game identification information sent from the gaming machine side at the time of communication restoration is the game identification information before transmission which is the game identification information before being transmitted to the gaming device and the game identification information transmitted to the gaming device. Since the game specific information is transmitted separately from the game specific information, the suitability of each game specific information can be individually determined as compared to the case where the game specific information is transmitted collectively together. Appropriate judgment results can be obtained by fine judgment.

(3) Still another aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine (P unit 2, S unit 2S) capable of communicating with a gaming device that enables gaming on a gaming machine,
Information transmitting means (FIGS. 14 to 16, input / output interface of payout control unit 171) for transmitting game specifying information for specifying game information that changes as a result of a game to be played,
The game specification information before transmission that is the game specification information before transmission to the gaming device (the latest game table information (game table information being counted)) is stored and the game specification information transmitted to the game device is transmitted. Game specific information storage means (FIG. 5: RAM of the payout control unit 171) for storing already-played game specific information (previous game table information),
The information transmission means includes the game specification information before transmission stored in the game specification information storage means and the game specification information stored in the game specification information storage means at the time of communication recovery after recovery from an incommunicable state in which communication with the gaming device is impossible. It includes a game specific information distinguishing / transmitting means (see FIGS. 15 and 16) for transmitting the transmitted game specific information in such a manner that the gaming device can distinguish it.

  According to the above configuration, the gaming device compares the pre-transmission game identification information sent from the gaming machine at the time of communication recovery, the transmitted game identification information, and the information stored on the gaming device side before the transmission. In order to determine whether or not the gaming machine identification information and the transmitted gaming identification information are appropriate information, and to ensure consistency between the gaming machine and the gaming information on the condition that it is determined to be appropriate Thus, it is possible to prevent improper restoration processing of game information on the gaming device side based on the pre-transmission game specifying information determined to be inappropriate or the transmitted game specifying information as much as possible.

  In addition, the gaming device is configured so that the game identification information sent from the gaming machine side at the time of communication recovery is the game identification information before transmission to the gaming device and the game identification information transmitted to the gaming device. Since the information is transmitted separately from the transmitted game specific information that is information, the suitability of each game specific information is individually judged as compared to the case where the game specific information is transmitted together. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an appropriate determination result based on detailed determination of appropriateness.

(4) In the gaming system (1) or the gaming device (2),
The gaming device is:
A game hall specifying information storage means (RAM of the payout control unit 171) for storing game hall specifying information (FIG. 8: store code) capable of specifying the game hall in which the game apparatus is installed;
Control device specifying information storage means (RAM of the payout control unit 171) for storing control device specifying information (FIG. 8: SC board ID) capable of specifying the control device provided in the gaming device;
A recording medium receiving means (card reader / writer) for receiving a recording medium (card) capable of specifying a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, holding balls, savings);
When the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means, the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means and the control device specifying information stored in the control apparatus specifying information storage means It further includes transmission means (FIG. 8: communication control IC 325a) for transmitting to the gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the game hall identification information and the control device identification information transmitted from the gaming device at the time of receiving the recording medium before the communication recovery, and the game hall identification transmitted at the time of the recording medium reception after the communication recovery It is possible for the gaming machine side to compare the information and the control device specifying information to determine whether or not they match.

(5) In the gaming system of (1) and (4) or the gaming machine of (3),
The gaming machine is
Order information (serial number (normal serial number)) that can specify to what repetition stage the game specifying information repeatedly transmitted by the information transmitting means has been received by the gaming apparatus is received from the gaming apparatus when the communication is restored. Order information receiving means (input / output interface of the payout control unit 171);
Based on the order information received by the order information receiving means, game specifying information reception determining means (FIGS. 14 to 16) for determining whether or not the game specifying information has been received by the gaming device until the last repetition stage. : The determination is made by comparing the last transmission serial numbers of the CU side and the P platform side)
The game specific information distinguishing and transmitting means, when the game specific information reception determining means determines that the game specific information has not been received until the last repetition stage, the pre-transmission game specific information and the transmitted game specific information Information is transmitted in such a manner that the gaming device can distinguish the information (FIG. 15: the latest game table information is transmitted in the first status information response after the communication start response after the previous game table information is included in the recovery response). .

  According to the above configuration, when it is determined that the game specifying information is not received by the gaming device until the last repetition stage, the gaming device can distinguish between the pre-transmission game specifying information and the transmitted game specifying information. Since it is transmitted in a mode, it is possible for the gaming device side to maintain consistency of game information including game identification information that has not been received. In addition, when it is determined that the game specifying information has been received up to the last repetition stage, the transmitted game specifying information is not transmitted to the gaming device unnecessarily, and the burden associated with information transmission can be reduced accordingly.

(6) In the gaming system of (1), (4), and (5) or the gaming device of (2) and (4),
The gaming device is:
Game information receiving means for receiving the current game information from the gaming machine (FIG. 5, FIG. 14: receiving a status information response of the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 23),
Based on the game specifying information received by the information receiving means, game information suitability judging means for judging suitability of the current game information received by the game information receiving means (FIG. 5: game balls stored in CU3) And the number of game balls transmitted from the P unit 2 are compared to determine a match).
The game information suitability determining means includes
Game information calculating means for calculating the current game information based on the initial value and the game specifying information based on the game information received by the game information receiving means when the communication is restored (FIG. 27B) (The current number of game balls is calculated by adding the number of additional balls sent from the P stand 2 shown in FIG. 5 and subtracting the number of subtracted balls from the initial number of game balls stored in S313) When,
The suitability of the current game information received by the game information receiving means is determined by comparing the game information calculated by the game information calculating means with the current game information received by the game information receiving means. (FIG. 5: The CU 3 compares the stored number of game balls with the number of game balls transmitted from the P unit 2 to determine coincidence).

  According to the above configuration, the current game information received from the gaming machine at the time of communication restoration is used as the initial value by the gaming device, and the current game information is calculated based on the initial value and the game specifying information. The game information becomes new game information in which the error with the game information on the gaming machine side is eliminated, and the suitability judgment is made by comparing the new game information with the current game information transmitted from the gaming machine side. It becomes possible to carry out accurately.

(7) In the gaming system of (1), (4), (5), and (6) or the gaming device of (2), (4), and (6),
The suitability determining means includes
The transmitted game identification information received by the game identification information distinction receiving means is compared with the information stored in the information storage means to determine whether or not the transmitted game identification information is appropriate information. First determination means (S301, S303, S323);
Information stored in the information storage means and updated based on the transmitted game specific information determined to be appropriate by the first determination means and transmitted by the game specific information distinction transmission means 2nd determination means (S311, S312) which compares with the said game pre-transmission specific information and determines whether this pre-transmission game specific information is appropriate information.

  According to the above configuration, the suitability determination of the two game specifying information is performed by determining the suitability of the pre-transmission game specifying information by the first determining means and determining the suitability of the transmitted game specifying information by the second determining means. Can be done steadily.

It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram for demonstrating display control of a game ball number display and a display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process when abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when paying out and carrying out the coins. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting game balls. It is a figure which shows an example used as the count NG at the place of the card unit and pachinko machine when counting game balls. It is a figure which shows an example of the count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the status information request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the count response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the count request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of the count response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of the game ball addition result abnormality at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P platform and CU regarding an addition serial number. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P stand and CU regarding a count serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 1st and 2nd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 3rd check process. It is a figure explaining the process of the business message sequence between SC and communication control IC. It is a figure explaining the process of the authentication sequence of communication control IC. It is a figure explaining the process of the authentication sequence of SC serial ID. It is a figure explaining the process of the authentication abnormality sequence of communication control IC. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

Embodiments according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
<Configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Each game island (not shown) arranged in the game hall (hall) has an enclosed circulation pachinko machine (hereinafter abbreviated as a game machine, pachinko machine, or P machine) 2 as an example of a game machine. Has been. Note that a card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3 as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 at a side position on a predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2. Yes.

  The pachinko machine 2 encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the firing motor 18 (see FIG. 2) is driven to make one shot of the enclosed ball. The game board 26 is configured so that it can be played one by one in the game area 27 in front of the game board 26. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand. Is detected by the touch sensor, and the firing motor 18 is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first type of pachinko machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278 is provided in the center of the game area 27. In addition, the game area 27 is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27 shown in FIG. 1, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271, three normal winning holes 272, 273, 274 and three start winning holes 275, 276, 277 are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276 is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278 includes a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols), and based on the detection signals of the start winning balls won in each start winning opening 275, 276, 277. Start variable display of multiple types of identification information. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271 is opened.

  Further, the display result of the variable display device 278 becomes a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (a slotted pattern), so that the probability variation big hit state And a probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is improved after the end of the jackpot state.

  Pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 are won in any of the winning openings or are collected in the out opening 154 without winning. The pachinko balls that have won any of the winning holes and the pachinko balls collected at the out-port 154 are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the pachinko machine 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  A display 54 is provided at a position below the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays various effect images linked to the display of the points, the remaining card amount, or the variable display device 278 to the player.

  Further, a counting button 28 is provided at the left position of the hitting operation handle 25 in the pachinko machine 2 for counting the game balls to the holding balls. In the present embodiment, the counting operation is repeatedly executed according to the time for which the counting button 28 is kept pressed. It should be noted that, regardless of the pressing duration time, if the button is pressed once, a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) may be counted from the gaming ball to the holding ball, or the counting button 28 is pressed once. All of the game balls currently owned by the player may be counted regardless of the pressing time (regardless of whether the button is pressed for a long time).

  As described above, since the counting button 28 is provided on the pachinko machine (P) 2 side, the person is sitting facing the pachinko machine 2 as compared with the case where the counting button 28 is provided on the card unit (CU) 3 side. Can improve the operability of the player.

  A game ball number display 29 for displaying the number of game balls is provided at the upper right of the counting button 28. The game ball number display 29 is a 7-segment display. The game ball number display 29 may be configured by a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

  The pachinko machine 2 according to the present embodiment can be divided into a game board 26 and other game frames (front frames) 6. In particular, the gaming board 26 is different for each model of pachinko machine developed by each company, while the gaming machine frame 6 is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, it is sufficient for the game store to replace only the game board 26 when replacing a new stand.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the card unit 3 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This card unit 3 is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or a member who has registered as a member in the game hall. Receive a membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a player. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The card unit 3 that has received these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of balls, or the number of stored balls) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. Have In the pachinko machine 2, a ball game equivalent to the number of balls specified by the data of game balls is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining balls that can be fired. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305 formed to project forward from the front side of the device, and a card insertion / discharge port for inserting a membership card or a visitor card 309 etc. are provided. A membership card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  In the protrusion 305 described above, on the surface facing the player, the display unit 312 and the member card ID recorded on the member card when the member card is received (also simply referred to as a card ID or C-ID). ) And a replay button 319 for performing a replay game using the number of stored balls specified by the member card ID.

  The display 312 displays the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card) (also referred to as the card balance or simply the balance), but can display the number of game balls and various other information. In addition, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, if the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball is converted into a converted game ball. Based on this, it is possible to play a game with the pachinko machine 2. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possession balls is not recorded and the storage ball is recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the storage ball is withdrawn and becomes a game ball. It is converted and the game by the pachinko machine 2 becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. Separately from the replay button 319, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the holding ball may be provided, and the replay button 319 may be a button dedicated to the withdrawal of the stored ball.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a ball deposited in the hall with a ball acquired before the previous day, and becomes a game ball by paying out the saving ball. The storage ball is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Mochitama” is a ball acquired on the day and becomes a game ball by paying out the possessionball. The number of possessed balls is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall. That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  A “game ball” is a ball that can be fired by a gaming machine. As described above, the data on the number of game balls is generated in exchange for withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card, holding balls, or storing balls.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but stored in association with the membership card number on a server installed in a game hall such as a hall management computer, and the corresponding storage ball is searched based on the membership card number. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server 801 in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server 801 in association with the card number. When the hall server 801 stores the card number in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server 801 may be written on the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is written directly on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  Note that the timing for storing the holding balls in a card (member card, visitor card) or hall server is stored at regular intervals every time the counting button 28 is operated and counting processing is performed, for example. It is conceivable that the timing is such that it is stored in a lump or when the card is returned.

  Also, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the card unit 3, the possession ball stored in the card unit 3 is temporarily stored in the hall server 801 as a stored ball, and the player returns the card. When the card is inserted into the same or another card unit 3 again on the same day as the date of receiving the card, only the possession balls for the day that have been stored once as stored balls are stored again in the card unit 3, and the range of the possessed balls The game balls may be added to allow the game to be played.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, an IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit (also referred to as an IR light receiving unit) 320, a ball lending button (also referred to as a lending button) 321 and a card return button 322 are further provided. The IR photosensitive unit 320 is an IR photosensitive unit 320 that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by an attendant at a game arcade, converts the infrared signal into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal. The ball lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the remaining amount recorded on the inserted card and using it in a game by the pachinko machine 2. The card return button 322 is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion−the number of conversions to game balls + count) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by the operation.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2. With reference to FIG. 2, the outline of the control circuit of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a CU control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The CU control unit 323 is a main control function unit of the card unit 3, and is a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like. ), A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area of the CPU, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like.

  The CU control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801 (see FIG. 4) for security management. A security board (SC board) 325 for communicating with the payout control board 17 of the pachinko machine 2 while ensuring security is connected to the CU control unit 323. The security board 325 is a security monitoring function unit of the card unit 3. Note that the CU control unit 323 may be provided on the security board 325, or the CU control unit 323 may be provided on a board different from the security board 325. The card unit 3 is provided with a connection part (not shown) to the pachinko machine 2 side, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection part (not shown) to the card unit 3 side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

  The security board 325 on the card unit 3 side and the payout control board 17 on the pachinko machine 2 side are communicably connected via this connector and connection wiring. The security board 325 is provided with a communication control IC 325a for controlling communication between the security board 325 and the payout control board 17, and a security chip (SC) 325b for monitoring the security of the pachinko machine 2. The SC 325b further includes a fraud detection unit 1325. The fraud detection unit 1325 performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323 to the pachinko machine 2, and manages the key when fraud is detected. The server 800 (see FIG. 4) is notified. Further, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800 as board control information.

  To the CU control unit 323, the authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier, and the identification result signal is input. In addition, when the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by an attendant at the game hall, a light reception signal is input to the CU control unit 323. The card reader / writer reads the information recorded in the inserted card into the CU control unit 323, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323. The CU control unit 323 writes the information to the card reader / writer. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card. The card recording information includes a card ID. The CU control unit 323 stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer until the game ends.

  The CU control unit 323 manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as the remaining amount or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323 to the display control unit 350, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350. The display data converted by the display control unit 350 is transmitted to the pachinko machine 2. The display data transmitted to the pachinko machine 2 is input to the display 312 via the relay board 14. The display 312 displays an image corresponding to the display data. Further, when the player operates a touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323 via the display control unit 350. When the player operates the ball lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. The ball lending button 321 is not limited to the configuration provided in the CU 3, and may be provided in the pachinko machine 2 to input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the card return button 322, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323.

  In the pachinko machine 2, the main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 2, the payout control board 17 that manages and stores the game balls, and the drive control of the launch motor 18 based on commands from the payout control board 17 A launch control board 31, a variable display device 278, and an effect control board 15 that controls the display of the variable display device 278 based on a command transmitted from the main control board 16.

  The main control board 16 and the effect control board 15 are provided on the game board 26. The main control board 16 is equipped with a game control microcomputer as the main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 is a main control function unit of the gaming machine. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU). Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161 is connected to a winning sensor 162 and a radio wave sensor 163 provided on the game board 26.

  When a ball wins each start winning opening 275, 276, 277, the main control unit 161 draws a random number for determining a big hit (or further including a small hit) / off and stores the random number. This is called reserved storage. The maximum value of the number of reserved memories is, for example, 4. When the variable display device 278 is ready to start a new variable display, the main control unit 161 digests one reserved memory, makes a jackpot determination based on the reserved memory, and derives the display result from the variable start. The variable display time to reach is determined from multiple types. Further, when the big hit is determined, it is also determined whether or not the probability fluctuation is caused. The main control unit 161 transmits the result of the jackpot determination (including whether or not to change the probability) and information regarding the variable display time to the effect control unit 151 mounted on the effect control board 15 as commands.

  The variable display command transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the effect control unit 151 specifies a variable start command indicating the start of variable display, a display result command indicating the result of variable display (big hit / out), and a variable display pattern. A variable display time command that is possible, a variable stop command that indicates the timing for deriving and displaying a variable display result, and the like are included. Furthermore, the commands transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the production control unit 151 include a command that can identify the progress status of the big hit during the big hit, a command that indicates the occurrence of a new reserved memory, and the occurrence of an error in the gaming state. There are commands to show.

  The effect control unit 151 determines the variable display content of the variable display device 278 based on these commands transmitted from the main control unit 161. For example, the effect control unit 151 specifies a variable display result and a variable display time based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 161, determines a stop symbol, and a variable display pattern (reach presence / absence, reach type). In addition, the effect pattern of the notice effect related to the big hit or reach is determined. The effect control unit 151 controls display of the variable display device 278 according to the determined variable display content.

  The effect control board 15 is also connected to the display 54 via the relay board 14 on the gaming machine frame 6 side. The effect control unit 151 transmits a display control signal for variable display or the like to the variable display device 278 and transmits a display control signal for performing display in conjunction with the display of the variable display device 278 to the display unit 54. Is possible. The relay board 14 and the display 54 may be provided on the CU3 side. In this case, the effect control board 15 on the P stand 2 side is connected to the relay board 14 provided in the CU 3.

  The payout control board 17 is provided on the front frame 6 (game frame). The payout control board 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171. The payout control unit 171 is a payout control function unit of the gaming machine. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  Further, a firing ball detection switch 903, an out ball detection switch 701, a foul ball detection switch 33, a counting button 28, and a radio wave sensor 173 are provided on the payout control board 17 in an electrically connected state. The radio wave sensor 173 is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173 is input to the payout control unit 171 via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17. The ball raising switch (upper) 41a detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and based on the detection, the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls.

  Accordingly, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173.

  From main control board 16 to payout control board 17, main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, number of symbols determined, jackpot information, manufacturer specific Jackpot information is sent.

  The main control chip ID (also referred to as main chip ID) is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16 of the pachinko machine 2, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the pachinko machine 2 is turned on. Information. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the winning opening). It is transmitted to the dispensing control board 17 when the machine 2 is turned on. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the pachinko machine 2 is powered on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17 performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a prize in any of the starting winning awards. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17 when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a winning ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16 is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the out ball detection signal is input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as will be described later. In the payout control board 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33, as described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch 903 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the fired ball detection signal is input updates the number of in-game balls by subtraction.

  The security board 325 of the card unit 3 and the payout control board 17 of the pachinko machine 2 are electrically connected, and various commands are transmitted from the security board 325 to the payout control board 17 as described later. On the contrary, various responses are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the security board 325 as described later.

  In addition to the payout control board 17, the front frame 6 (game frame) is provided with a relay board 14, a launch control board 31, a launch motor 18, and a game ball number display 29. The game ball number indicator 29 may be directly attached to the front frame 6, but it may be attached to the front frame 6 like an upper plate or a lower plate provided on the front side of a normal pachinko machine from which balls are paid out. You may make it provide in the aspect which can be rotated. The same applies to the display 54. The payout control unit 171 of the payout control board 17 displays the number of game balls currently owned by the player on the game ball number display 29.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17 to the firing control board 31. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state where it is bullet-launched into the game area 27. The firing control board 31 emits a firing motor excitation output to drive the firing motor 18 when a touch ring input signal for detecting that the player is touching the hitting ball operating handle 25 is input.

  A display 54 is provided in the front frame 6 (game frame). The display 54 receives display data (display control signal) from the display control unit 350 of the card unit 3 via the relay board 14. Further, the display unit 54 receives display data (display control signal) from the effect control board 15 via the relay board 14.

  The relay board 14 outputs a display control signal from one of the effect control board 15 and the display control unit 350 to the display 54 and outputs the display control signal to the display 54 based on the display control signal from the effect control board 15 or the display control unit 350. A switching circuit 141 for displaying an image is mounted.

  In this embodiment, the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side is configured to be controlled on the CU side. Instead, the display 54 is controlled to be displayed on the pachinko machine 2 side. A display control substrate may be provided. In this case, the display control board controls display of the display 54 based on a command from the payout control unit 171.

  The RAM clear switch 293 is a switch for erasing game table information and game information stored in the RAM of the P table 2, and after the P table enters an error state, the store clerk operates the switch to initialize It becomes possible to return to the state. The RAM clear switch 293 is operated by a store clerk after the card is discharged, for example.

<Pachinko ball circulation route>
Here, the circulation path of the pachinko balls in the pachinko machine 2 will be outlined with reference to FIG. 1 and FIG.

  When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the firing motor 18 is driven. As a result, one pachinko ball that has been supplied to the launch position is shot by the hitting hammer and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The detection of the play of the game ball is detected when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is changed from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input on the payout control board 17 (see FIG. 2) on which the payout control unit 171 is provided. Based on the detection, the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls. To do.

  Out of balls that have been driven into the game area 27, the out balls that have entered the out port 154 (see FIG. 1) flow down the out ball flow path and are detected by an out ball detection switch 701 provided in the middle. . The foul balls flow down through the foul ball return path and are detected by a foul ball detection switch 33 provided in the middle of the foul ball.

  All winning balls that have won the winning opening and the variable winning ball device are collected on the back of the gaming machine and guided to the collection ball passing path. Similarly, out balls and foul balls are also guided to the collection ball passing path. A firing ball detection switch 903 is provided in the collection ball passage route. For this reason, the winning ball, the out ball, and the foul ball are all detected by the firing ball detection switch 903. That is, the fired ball detection switch 903 is a switch that detects all of the bullets that have been bulleted. When the number detected by the switch and the number of shots of the pachinko balls shot by the firing motor 18 become equal, it can be determined that all the pachinko balls that have been driven are collected.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the difference between the number of shots detected by the shot ball detection switch 903 and the number of bullets is calculated. When this difference is not zero, the balls that have been driven into the game area 27 have not been collected. It is determined that it is not. By making this determination, it can be determined whether the game area 27 is rolling, or whether there is a floating ball that does not fall due to being caught between nails or the like in the game area.

<Display control of touch panel>
FIG. 3 is a block diagram for explaining display control of the game ball number display 29 and the display 54. In FIG. 3, only the main components related to the display control of the game ball number display 29 and the display 54 among the various configurations of the CU 3 and the P stand 2 illustrated in FIG. 2 are illustrated.

  The main control unit 161 mounted on the main control board 16 transmits various types of game information that change with game control to the payout control part 171 of the payout control board 17. The payout control unit 171 transmits ball number information and the like to the CU control unit 323 based on the game information transmitted from the main control unit 161, and controls display of the game ball number display 29. As a result, the number of game balls currently owned by the player is displayed on the game ball number display 29, and the display of the number of game balls is subtracted and updated based on the ball launch or counting operation, The display of the number of game balls is added and updated on the basis of a ball lending operation or the like.

  The CU control unit 323 updates the game information such as the number of game balls stored by itself based on the number of balls information transmitted from the payout control unit 171. Further, the CU control unit 323 stores the remaining amount of the card and the player's possession ball, and the display control unit displays information for display based on the stored game information on the display 54 on the P table 2 side. To 350. The display control unit 350 transmits a display control signal based on the information to the relay board 14 on the P table 2 side.

  On the other hand, a display control signal from the effect control unit 151 of the effect control board 15 is also input to the relay board 14. The effect control unit 151 transmits a display control signal for display control of the variable display device 278 based on various variable display commands received from the main control unit 161 to the variable display device 278 and controls the display 54. A display control signal for transmission is also transmitted to the relay board 14.

  Usually, the display control signal is transmitted to the relay board 14 only from the display control unit 350 side of the CU 3, and the display control signal is not transmitted from the effect control unit 151. As a result, normally, the display unit 54 displays information such as points and card balance based on the display control signal from the display control unit 350 of the CU 3. However, when the effect control unit 151 detects a change in the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 161, it transmits a display control signal corresponding to the change in the gaming state to the relay board 14. .

  When the display control signal is input from the effect control unit 151, the switching circuit 141 receives the display control signal input from the effect control unit 151 instead of the display control signal input from the display control unit 350 to the display unit 54. Switch the circuit to transmit. As a result, the display 54 normally displays a score based on the display control on the CU 3 side. For example, when the game state changes due to a big hit display on the variable display device 278, the display The display of 54 is switched to one that interlocks with the display of the variable display device 278 such as a jackpot display. After that, when transmission of the display control signal from the effect control unit 151 to the relay board 14 is stopped, the switching circuit 141 returns the signal input source to the switching source. As a result, information based on the display control on the CU 3 side is displayed again on the display unit 54.

  That is, in the above example, the switching circuit 141 has a configuration in which, among the effect control unit 151 and the display control unit 350, the display control signal input from the effect control unit 151 is preferentially transmitted to the display unit 54. Since the display control signal is input to the switching circuit 141 only from the display control unit 350 in normal times, information based on the display control on the CU3 side is displayed on the display unit 54, and a switching condition such as occurrence of a big hit is established. When the display control signal is input from the effect control unit 151, the display control signal is prioritized and transmitted to the display 54, and the display on the display 54 is switched.

  However, instead of this, the switching circuit 141 adopts a configuration in which the display control signal input from the display control unit 350 is preferentially transmitted to the display unit 54 among the effect control unit 151 and the display control unit 350. Also good.

  That is, the switching circuit 141 performs an effect display that is linked to the display of the variable display device 278 on the display 54 based on a display control signal that is always received from the effect control unit 151 at a normal time, and there are few remaining game points and points. When a display control signal for displaying that fact is input from the CU 3 side when the predetermined switching condition is established, the signal input source is switched from the effect control unit 151 to the display control unit 359, whereby the display 54 However, the game effect screen may change to a screen for notifying that there are few game points or points remaining.

  In the present embodiment, the display control of the game ball number display 29 for displaying the number of game balls is not performed by the CU 3 but by the P stand 2 directly related to the fluctuation of the game ball number. When used and subtracted or added by game, the updated number of game balls can be immediately reflected on the game ball number display 29.

  If the display control of the game ball number display 29 is performed by the CU 3, from the CU 3 to the game ball number display 29 based on the information on the number of game balls transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. A display control signal is sent. However, in this case, the number of game balls actually changes depending on the communication status between the CU 3 and the P stand 2, but the change is displayed on the game ball number display 29. There is a risk of inconvenience that it will not be reflected immediately. According to the present embodiment, such inconvenience can be prevented.

  On the other hand, since the display 54 controls the display on the CU3 side, the display control of the P stand 2 is compared with the case where the P stand 2 that controls the display of the game ball number display 29 further controls the display 54. The burden can be reduced.

  Here, a specific example of switching the display of the display unit 54 will be given. For example, during normal times, the remaining amount of the card is displayed on the display (touch panel) 54 based on the display control of the display control unit 350 of the CU 3, and the display on the display 54 can be changed according to the change in the gaming state such as a big hit An example can be given in which the display is switched to one linked to the display of the display device 278.

  Alternatively, the display (touch panel) 54 normally displays in conjunction with the display of the variable display device 278 (based on the display control of the effect control unit 151), and game points are displayed on the display 54 according to the decrease in game points. The example which displays the image which alert | reports that there are few remaining can be given.

  In addition, when the display device 54 performs a display operation with a display control signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151 to the relay board 14, the relay board 14 simply relays the signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151 and displays it as it is. It suffices to have a function of transmitting to the device 54. On the other hand, there may be a case where the signal form of the display control signal for causing the display device 54 to perform display operation and the signal form of the display control signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151 are different. In addition to the switching circuit 141, the relay substrate 14 may be provided with a conversion circuit that converts the signal form.

  Further, when the switching condition is established, the display image displayed on the display unit 54 by the display control signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151 and the display control signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151 are displayed on the variable display device 278. The images may be the same or different. If they are different, it is necessary to store two types of image data, that is, image data for the variable display device 278 and image data for the display 54 in the effect control unit 151.

  The game ball number display 29 may be configured to be controlled by the main control unit 161, or the effect control unit 151 transmits a command related to the number of game balls from the main control unit 161 to the effect control unit 151. It is good also as a structure which controls display.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment described above, since the display information of the P table 2 can display the effect information related to the variable display, it is possible to provide a game with a high effect in effect together with the variable display device 278. In addition, when a condition for displaying game information sent from the CU 3 side is established on the display unit 54, display control for displaying the game information on the display unit 54 is executed by the CU 3, so the condition is established. In this case, the display 54 can be used not only for game effects but also for display of game information by the CU 3, and the display control burden of the P table 2 accompanying display of game information can be reduced.

<Notification process for abnormalities in card units and pachinko machines>
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 4, when an abnormality occurs in CU control unit 323, security board 325, payout control unit 171, or main control board 16, notification is given in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 4. For the abnormality mentioned here, the CU control unit 323, the security board 325, the payout control unit 171, or the main control board 16 is replaced with another illegally manufactured one, or malfunction or failure occurs due to noise or the like. Or offline status due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 shown in FIG. 4 manages keys that store the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the card unit 3. It is a server. The key management server 800 is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the security substrate 325 of the card unit 3, the CU control unit 323 detects an abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the CU control unit 323 and the security substrate 325 described above. This mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later.

  The serial ID is a serial ID (substrate serial ID) of the security board 325, and is stored in the ROM of the security chip 325b when the security chip 325b of the security board 325 is manufactured. Further, when the CU 3 is brought into the amusement hall and connected to the hall server 801, the board serial ID is downloaded from the key management server 800 of the key management center via the hall server 801 and stored in the CU control unit 323. The

  When the CU control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the security board 325, the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall server 801 to that effect and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 350 of the card unit 3. The CU control unit 323 controls the display 312 to display that an abnormality has occurred and causes the display control unit 350 to perform an abnormality notification by lighting or blinking an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, the CU control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the hall management computer.

  When an abnormality occurs in the CU control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the security board 325 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and notifies the payout control unit 171 of a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that fact. . In response, the payout control unit 171 notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control to operate the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer.

  When the security board 325 detects an abnormality of the payout control unit 171, the CU control unit 323 is notified of this, and the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall server 801 accordingly.

  As described above, when the security board 325 detects an abnormality of the CU control unit 323, the security board 325 notifies the payout control unit 171 of the fact. When detecting an abnormality of the payout control unit 171, the security board 325 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the fact. The notification destination of abnormality occurrence by the security board 325 is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. In addition, the security board 325 has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The payout control unit 171 that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the security board 325 notifies the main control board 16 to that effect. Upon receiving the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for abnormality notification as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, the security board 325 detects that fact and notifies the CU control unit 323 that the abnormality has occurred. The CU control unit 323 performs the above-described abnormality notification control. The hall server 801 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the main control board 16, and upon receiving the notification, the above-described abnormality notification control is performed.

  As described above, the payout control board 17 detects and notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16 when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325, while notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16. It detects and notifies the security board 325 that an abnormality has occurred. As with the security board 325 described above, the payout control board 17 is also controlled for anomaly notification even when a notice is given to the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have a function of performing abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Absent. In the above description, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and perform abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Although described as having no function, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 may be provided with an abnormality notification function to directly notify that an abnormality has occurred.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on the card unit 3 side and the pachinko machine 2 side, and the transmission / reception mode thereof. With reference to FIG. 5, main ones of various data stored on the card unit 3 side (CU side) and the pachinko machine 2 side (P base side) and transmission / reception modes thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the number of game balls is calculated on the P stand 2 side, and the current latest game ball number is stored and managed. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU 3 side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2 side. On the other hand, the CU3 side manages and stores the number of possessed balls (the number of cards possessed), the number of stored balls, and the remaining card amount (remaining amount).

  FIG. 5 shows RAM storage data provided in the CU control unit 323 on the CU3 side and RAM storage data mounted on the payout control board 17 on the P table 2 side. First, when the power supply is turned on for the first time when the P stand 2 (pachinko machine 2) and the CU 3 (card unit 3) are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game hall, the payout control board on the P stand 2 side. 17 has a main chip ID (main control chip ID) transmitted from the main control board 16, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3 side, and also issues a payout chip ID (payout) stored in the payout control board 17 itself. Control chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3 side.

  On the CU3 side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time at which communication is started after the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P base 2 side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3 side are stored on the CU3 side and the P stand 2 side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side.

  On the CU 3 side, the transmitted data is collated with the data already stored, and it is determined whether or not the same P base 2 is connected as in the previous time. As for the connection time data, every time the power is turned on, new connection time data in which communication between the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side is started is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side. Time data is stored on the P table 2 side.

  Both the CU and the P platform transmit the “sequential number” added to the message. Further, both the CU and the P platform store the “serial number” received from the other party. There are three types of “serial number”: “normal serial number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Normal sequence number” indicates the sequence number of the message. “Normal serial number” is transmitted by counting up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission on the CU3 side (primary station side) with an initial value “1”. However, the “normal serial number” is not counted up at the time of retransmission. P station 2 side (secondary station side) transmits the received serial number as it is. Note that there is no response if the serial number continuity is not established. The “additional serial number” is a serial number used when the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to add game balls. The “counting serial number” is a serial number used when the P stand 2 requests the CU 3 to count game balls.

  Only the CU3 has the right to update the normal serial number. When the normal serial number that is the same as the transmitted normal serial number is returned, the CU 3 backs up and stores the normal serial number and transmits the updated normal serial number. Only the CU3 has the addition update right of the addition serial number. When the addition request is made, the CU 3 transmits an addition sequence number added to the addition sequence number that has been used for communication until then to the P unit 2. The P platform 2 returns the same addition serial number when accepting the request. When rejecting the request, the previously received addition sequence number (the addition sequence number received this time-1) is returned. Only the P-unit 2 has the counting update number addition update right. When making a request for counting, the P platform 2 transmits to the CU 3 a counting sequence number that is +1 to the counting sequence number that has been used for communication. When CU3 accepts the request, it returns the same counting sequence number. When rejecting the request, the received counting sequence number (counting sequence number-1 received this time) is returned.

  In the following, with regard to “normal serial number”, a configuration will be described in which the serial number received by the CU 3 at the time of transmission is counted up (+1) and transmitted. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Each of the P base 2 and the CU 3 or the serial number received by the P base 2 at the time of transmission is counted up (+1), and the other is the received serial number. May be transmitted as it is.

  The “addition serial number” and “counting serial number” are special serial numbers that are counted up in the addition request processing and the count request processing, respectively. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a configuration in which “normal serial number” is also counted up when the “additional serial number” and “counting serial number” are counted up. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to stop the “normal sequence number” from being counted up when the “additional sequence number” and the “counting sequence number” are counted up. In the following, “normal serial number” is simply referred to as “serial number”. The “additional sequence number” and “counting sequence number” are also collectively referred to as “request sequence number”.

  The latest game machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2 side to the CU 3 side. This latest game table information is stored in the latest game table information storage area of the RAM of the payout control unit 171 (see FIG. 2) on the P table 2 side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game table information, and is transmitted from the P table 2 side to the CU 3 side as the count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later. However, instead of this, or in addition to the game ball counter, the number of game balls may be included in the latest game table information.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”. Here, the “prize ball” is a ball that is paid out when a ball wins a winning opening, and is a safe ball. The “fired ball” is a ball fired by the gaming machine. When there is a back ball, the number of balls obtained by subtracting the back ball is the number of fired balls. The “back ball” is a ball in which the fired ball returns without jumping onto the board surface. The “out mouth passing ball” is a ball that has passed through the out mouth 154, and the total number of balls of the out ball and the safe ball means the number of balls passing through the out mouth.

  For example, when a pachinko ball that has been placed in the game area 27 wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, an additional ball to which a gaming ball is added based on the winning information. The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. Also, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (subtraction ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171 counts the number of gaming balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting number of balls) from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side.

  On the P-unit 2 side, each time the values of the addition ball counter, the subtraction ball counter, and the counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3 side, the count values are stored in the previous gaming machine information storage area (the RAM of the payout control unit 171). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, and counted ball counter as the latest game table information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, the game table information transmitted to the CU 3 side immediately before is added to the storage area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before). Stored as data. When the latest game machine information is not transmitted from the P machine 2 side to the CU 3 side, the backup data includes not only the value of each counter at the time of the next transmission but also the value of each counter of the previous time that was not transmitted. It is intended to enable transmission. You may make it memorize | store by adding the number of game balls transmitted immediately before to this last game machine information.

  Further, the payout control board 17 updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU 3 side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3 side, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of balls stored, the remaining amount, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), total subtraction are stored in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM. The number of balls (the total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value (number of added balls) of the added ball counter transmitted from the P stand 2 side to update the number of balls. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2 side. Further, based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P stand 2, the number of card holding balls is added and updated. In this way, the CU 3 can manage the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the latest game table information transmitted from the P table 2 one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3 has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of a game ball number counter (also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2 side. CU3 updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU 3 stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification lamp or indicator 312 is used to notify an error, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801 (in this case, hall management). An error notification may be performed by a computer or hall server 801). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU 3 side may be replaced with the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P unit 2 side. Good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU 3 side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2 side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU 3 side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P-unit 2 side. (CU3 side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2 side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3 side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3 side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3 side and the Pball 2 side are stored by the hall server 801 or the hall management computer connected to the CU3. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the CU 3 stores a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the remaining card amount of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (the number of added balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 2) stores a stored ball in response to an input requesting the use of the stored ball (for example, a press input of the replay button 319 provided in the CU 3 (when there is no holding ball)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 2) is an input requesting the use of the holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319 provided on the CU 3 when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 2) subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area for storing the card remaining amount in response to an input requesting use of the card remaining amount (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321).

  When a player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls that are deducted is the number of balls The number of balls to be added to the counter is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P stand 2 side. In response to this, the P stand 2 side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  In the gaming system according to the present embodiment, on the other hand, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image in which, in a conventional encapsulated pachinko machine in which each counter is provided, it is prohibited to grab a ball before counting remaining on a plate by hand and use it for a wagon service.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. Has been. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. In response to this, the CU3 side subtracts the number of game balls and adds and updates the number of card possessions.

<Frame configuration used in communication>
Next, communication between the CU 3 and the P base 2 according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail. A message used in the communication is composed of a frame having a predetermined format. Transmission data (message) is always transmitted in units of one frame. In other words, the message is not divided and transmitted. Moreover, when transmitting a message | telegram continuously, the space | interval of 1 millisecond or more is opened.

  One frame of transmission data includes a data length, a normal sequence number, an addition sequence number, a counting sequence number, a command, and a data portion. “Data length” indicates the data length of the transmission data (serial number to data portion (business message range)). “Command” is a command code of the message. The “data part” is data of a message.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between the card unit (CU) 3 and the pachinko machine (P unit) 2 will be described.

  FIG. 6 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

<< 1. Recovery request, 2. Recovery response >>
First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information from the P unit 2. In response to this recovery request, a response named recovery response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response of the recovery response notifies the CU 3 of the recovery information.

  The recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 after the CU 3 completes the authentication. The recovery request command requests recovery information from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, and the CU 3 transmits the command first after the authentication is completed. The recovery request includes “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, and “previous final transmission count serial number”. “Serial number” is a sequence number (1 to 255). “Command” is a command code for requesting status information, and is represented by binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The “last last transmission sequence number” is the sequence number of the command for requesting the state information last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the time of the previous connection. When “Previous Last Transmission Sequence Number” is “0”, this indicates a state where there is no stored sequence number. The “previous last transmission serial number” is a serial number that stores the “sequential number” as the last final transmission serial number (serial number) when the status information response is received at the CU3 and when the status information response is received at the CU3. It is.

  “Previous last transmission count sequence number” is a count sequence number of a response to the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the previous connection. “Last transmission count sequence number” indicates that there is no stored sequence number when “0”. The “previous last transmission count sequence number” is a sequence number that stores the count sequence number as the previous last transmission count sequence number on the P unit 2 and the CU 3 side when receiving the status information response to the CU 3 when the P unit 2 transmits the status information response. .

  In the recovery process (counting ball count) of the P unit 2, the P unit 2 refers to the “previous last transmission count sequence number” notified from the CU 3, and counts if the CU 3 has not performed the count process for the count request. Assume that there was no request. In this case, the P stand 2 does not execute the game ball subtraction process corresponding to the counting request notified to the CU 3 itself. On the other hand, the P stand 2 refers to the “previous last transmission count sequence number” notified from the CU 3, and when the CU 3 determines that the counting process has been performed, the game ball is subtracted from the number of game balls before counting. Confirm.

  The response of the recovery response is a response to the recovery information held in the P base 2 with respect to the CU 3. Recovery information includes “sequential number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, “last inserted card ID”, “previous card insertion time”, “previous last transmission addition serial number”, “game information storage presence / absence”, “ “Previous Game Table Information” and “Previous Game Information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Previous last transmission serial number” is data of a serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3 at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no stored serial number. “Previously inserted card ID” is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and “0” indicates that there is no inserted card. The payout control unit 171 of the P table 2 stores and holds the card ID that was being inserted based on the information transmitted from the CU 3.

  “Previous card insertion time” is data on the insertion time of a card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and when it is “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is. The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is an addition serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3 at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no additional serial number. “Game information storage presence / absence” is “0x00” when game information is not stored, and “0x01” when game information is stored.

  The “previous gaming machine information” is the gaming machine information previously notified to the CU 3, and includes “the number of gaming balls”, “the number of fired balls”, “the number of balls passing through the outlet”, “the total number of winning ball balls”, “the counting ball” It includes information on “number” and “counting serial number”. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls notified to the CU 3 last time. “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls previously notified to CU3. The “out mouth passing ball count” is the number of out mouth passing balls notified to the CU 3 last time. The “total prize ball number” is the total prize ball number notified to the CU 3 last time. “Counting balls” is the number of counting balls notified to CU3 last time. “Counting sequence number” is the counting sequence number notified to the CU 3 last time.

  The “previous game information” is game information previously notified to the CU 3, and includes information on “number of game information”, “type information 1” to “type information n”, “prize ball information 1” to “prize ball information n”. Is included. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3 last time. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. “Type information 1” is the game type information 1 notified to the CU 3 last time. “Type information n” is the game type information n notified to the CU 3 last time. “Prize ball information 1” is game prize ball information 1 notified to the CU 3 last time. “Prize ball information n” is game prize ball information n notified to the CU 3 last time.

  The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is a serial number that is stored as the last final transmission addition serial number on the CU 3 side and the P base 2 when the state information request is received at the CU 3 and when the status information request is received at the P base 2.

  The P unit 2 compares the “previous last transmission sequence number” included in the recovery request received first from the CU 3 with the previous last transmission sequence number stored in the P unit 2, and determines whether or not they match. judge. If they match, it is determined that it is not necessary to transmit recovery information. If they do not match, it is determined that recovery information needs to be transmitted. In the former case, the information in the recovery response is set to “no game information stored” and a recovery response not including recovery data (game information) is returned to the CU 3. On the other hand, in the latter case, the recovery response including the recovery data (game information) is returned to the CU 3 with the information in the recovery response as “gaming information stored”.

  When there is no recovery information for game information or when the last transmission sequence number is 0, “game information storage presence / absence” is not stored “0x00”, and “previous game machine information” and “previous game information” are set to ALL “0”. ”Is set. In addition, when the “last previous transmission serial number” process notified from the P table 2 is not performed, the CU 3 performs the recovery process using the previous game machine information. If the “last previous transmission serial number” process is being performed, the CU 3 performs the recovery process using only the previous game machine information. However, the number of balls is not recovered.

  In addition, when recovery processing cannot be performed due to a mismatch of communication partners (for example, replacement of the CU 3 or the P unit 2), it may be possible to manually correct by POS based on the display information of the P unit 2. For example, it is conceivable that the display information of the P base 2 is displayed using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278. Alternatively, it is also conceivable that a display device controlled by the payout control unit 171 is further provided on the P table 2 and information for manual correction is displayed on the display device. Note that POS refers to a free gift management system for exchanging free gifts and managing free gifts. In addition, POS is not limited to those for exchanging prizes or managing prizes, but records general sales information for each sale of merchandise at a store and uses the aggregated results as inventory management or marketing materials. It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

<< 3. Recovery request 2, 4. Recovery response 2 >>
A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The command of the recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2. In response to this recovery request 2, a response named recovery response 2 is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. This response of the recovery response 2 notifies the CU 3 of the processing result of the added recovery information.

  The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the additional recovery information to the P unit 2 and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission additional serial number”, and “additional number of balls”. Yes. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The recovery request 2 is transmitted when the CU 3 determines that it is necessary to perform the additional ball recovery process in the P stand 2. The CU 3 compares the “previous last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery response received from the P unit 2 with the “previous final transmission addition serial number” stored in the CU 3, and if they match, the additional ball recovery is performed. It is determined that processing is not necessary, and in the case of mismatch, it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary. When it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary, a recovery request 2 is transmitted.

  The “last last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery request 2 is data of the addition serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the previous connection, and the “addition ball number” is the game ball This is data on the number of balls added.

  Next, the recovery process of the P base 2 will be described in detail. The recovery process of the P unit 2 is based on the recovery request 2 and, if the “last previous transmission serial number” process notified from the CU 3 has not been performed, This is a process of performing addition.

  The response of the recovery response 2 is for notifying the CU 3 of the processing result of the added recovery information at the P unit 2 and includes “serial number”, “command”, and “recovery result”. The “recovery result” is a recovery result OK when “0x00”, and a recovery result NG when “0x01”. In addition, when the P stand 2 is in a state where the number of additional balls cannot be received, a process NG is returned as a recovery result.

<< 5. 5. Communication start request, Communication start response >>
A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This communication start request command requests the P base 2 to start communication. In response to this communication start request, a response to the communication start response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response to the communication start response is a response to the CU 3 for communication start.

  The communication start request command notifies the P unit 2 that communication has started normally. Receiving the communication start request, the P base 2 clears the recovery information stored so far. The communication start request command includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The CU 3 sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after the communication start request, and the P unit 2 also sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after receiving the communication start request.

  The response to the communication start response is to notify the CU 3 that the communication has started normally, and the CU 3 clears the recovery information. The response of the communication start response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 7. 7. Communication end request, Communication end response >>
A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2 to end communication. In response to this communication end request, a response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This communication end response is a response to the end of communication to the CU3.

  The communication end request command notifies the P unit 2 that the communication has ended normally, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response of the communication end response is to notify the CU 3 that the communication has ended normally, and the CU 3 and the P stand 2 stop the communication and wait for the restart after the notification. The response of the communication end response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 9. Status information request >>
A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The CU 3 uses this command to periodically check the status of the P base 2. The status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU 3 side to the P stand 2 side shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information request includes data of “sequential number”, “command”, “CU state”, “addition ball number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “CU state” represents the state of the CU 3 notified to the P base 2, and indicates that a card is being inserted when Bit 0 is “1”, and no card is inserted when “0”. That is, Bit0 represents a state where a card (general card / member card) is inserted in CU3. In addition, a general card is being inserted by depositing into a stock card (general 0 yen 0 card) stocked in advance in the card stock section of CU3.

  When Bit 1 is “1”, the card unit is being opened, and when it is “0”, the card unit is being closed. That is, Bit1 notifies the P unit 2 of the card unit opening state according to the state of CU3. The timing for notifying the opening of the card unit is, for example, when the opening of the card unit is completed. The timing for notifying that the card unit is closed is, for example, when the store is closed. Note that when the same state changes from opening to closing, the P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 with a status information response as the number of all playing game balls being held.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the card return preparation is in progress, and when “0”, the card return preparation is not in progress. The CU 3 notifies the P stand 2 of “preparing for card return” for a certain time (10 seconds) by setting this bit during each operation of card return, simple leaving, and meal break. When the operation of the counting button 28 is detected, the P table 2 has operated the counting button once or a plurality of times if it has received a status information request with the bit being prepared for card return turned on. Regardless of the operation duration, regardless of the operation duration time, all the stored game balls are notified to the CU 3 by counting the number of balls.

  When Bit 3 is “1”, a game ball addition request is shown, and when Bit 3 is “0”, no game ball addition request is shown. That is, Bit3 requests addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and stored ball payout operations.

  When Bit 4 is “1”, completion of counting ball reception is indicated, and “0” indicates that counting ball is not received. Bit4 notifies P stand 2 that the receipt has been completed when the counting ball is received. That is, it is used to confirm delivery of the response “count ball” of the state information response. Bit 5 to Bit 7 are not used.

  The “added ball number” is the added ball number of game balls, and the data of the added ball number is valid only when Bit 3 in the CU state is “1”. The “addition serial number” is an addition sequence number (0 to 255), and is notified by updating (+1) the sequence number when a game ball addition request is made. The “counting sequence number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and the count sequence number received when the count is requested is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the counting sequence number is not established, the counting is not received.

<< 10. Status information response >>
In response to the status information request, a response of the status information response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response of the status information response is to notify the information / status of the P platform 2 to the CU 3. The response of the status information response includes the latest game table information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  The specific data of this status information request includes “sequential number”, “command”, “number of game balls”, “number of fired balls”, “number of balls passed through the outro”, “total number of ball balls”, “count request ball” Data of “number”, “counting serial number”, “launch strength”, “game table state”, “tamper detection information” and “game information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “number of game balls” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The “number of game balls” calculates the number of game balls held by the CU 3 by using the “total prize ball number”, “number of fired balls”, and “count ball number” described later. Thereafter, the CU 3 checks whether the calculated number of game balls of the CU 3 matches the number of game balls of the P unit 2.

  “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls (summed if there are balls fired multiple times at the time of transmission). However, if there are back balls, subtract the number of back balls. That is, the “number of fired balls” (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3. If the data is received without holding the card, CU3 does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is 0.

  “The number of balls that have passed through the outlet” is the number of balls that have passed through the outlet 154 (when there are a plurality of balls that have passed during transmission, they are added together).

  “Total number of prize balls” is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The prize ball information 1-n is the number of prize balls for each prize opening type such as a start opening, a big winning opening, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening), and the like. Note that the “total prize ball number” (addition) does not include the “addition request ball number” transmitted from the CU 3. In addition, the CU 3 adds the data of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls held. When the data for the total number of winning balls is received without holding the card, CU3 does not add the number of gaming balls.

  The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. That is, the “count ball” (subtraction) is data that is subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3 and added to the number of cards held. Note that the number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. Further, when the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3 does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is 0.

  However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls held by the gaming machine are counted and set as the number of counting balls. When the card unit opening state is open, the operation of the counting button 28 is performed, so that the number of game balls is counted and set as the number of counting balls. However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls are automatically counted and set as the number of counting balls without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28.

  The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and is updated (+1) and notified when a counting is requested.

“Launch strength” is the strength for launching a game ball.
The “gaming table state” indicates the state of the P table 2 when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P table 2, and the “gaming table state 1”, “gaming table state 2”, “ It includes information on “game table state 3” and “game table error state”.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 1” indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When “0”, the game is permitted, and when “1”, the game is prohibited. Bit1 indicates whether or not the fan (player) is playing (balls are being fired), and is “0” when waiting (the fan is not firing a ball), and “1”. The game is in progress (a state in which the fan is firing a ball), but there is a game ball and the game is in the state in which the launch handle (hitting ball operating handle 25) is touched (touch sensor touched).

  Bit 2 indicates the presence / absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When “0”, there are a number of game balls, and when “1”, there is no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. That is, it shows whether all the floating balls in the game area 27 have been collected. However, it does not include ball stoppages due to a fire stop switch (also called a single shot switch). When it is “0”, the game is incomplete (a state where all balls are unconfirmed), and when it is “1”, a game is complete (a state where all balls are confirmed). Note that if the completion of the game is not confirmed for 15 seconds or more after the ball launch is stopped, the P platform 2 times out and the game is completed.

  Bit 4 indicates whether or not a game ball is counted (whether or not a count button is pressed). When “0”, there is no request, when “1”, there is a count acceptance request at the start of counting or a counting ball payout request. It is. When the counting operation is detected, the P platform transmits a count information ON status information response to the CU and confirms whether or not the counting request has been received. When “1”, it is a count request. Bit 5 indicates the processing result of the game ball addition, which is addition OK when “0” and addition NG when “1”. Bit 6 to Bit 7 are reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 2” represents jackpot information jackpot 1 (all jackpots), and “1” is set during all jackpots. Bit 1 represents big hit 2 of big hit information (big hit + small hit), and sets “1” during all big hits and small hits. Bit 2 represents the big hit 3 of the big hit information (big hit of the big ball), and “1” is set during the big hit where the big ball is big. Bit 3 represents big hit 4 of big hit information (big hit of small ball), and “1” is set during big hit with small ball. Bit 4 represents a big hit 5 of the big hit information (a big hit in the outgoing ball), and “1” is set during the big hit in the middle of the outgoing ball. Bit5 to Bit7 are reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 3” represents a big hit in the gaming state information + short time, and “1” is set in the big hit and short time. Bit1 represents the probability change of the game state information, and “1” is set during the probability change. Bit 2 represents the time of the game state information, and “1” is set during the time reduction. Bit3 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “gaming table error state” indicates an error code that is occurring in the P table 2, and each error code is expressed using Bit0 to Bit5. Note that there is no error when Bit 0 to Bit 5 are all “0”. Bit 6 is information for specifying a place where an error has occurred, and represents payout control when “0” and main control when “1”. Bit 7 indicates an error output method. When “0”, only an alert is issued, and when “1”, an alert + output to the hall server 801 is indicated.

  The “fraud detection information” is information detected by the P machine 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P machine 2, and includes “fraud detection state 1” and “fraud detection state 2”. , “Illegal detection information 1” to “fraud detection information 4” and “additional serial number” are included.

  The “fraud detection state 1” is fraud detection information of the main control board 16. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 1” indicates fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit1 indicates that it is the positive detection information that the magnetic sensor is not detected when “1”. Bit2 represents fraud detection information for fraud detection when “1”. Bit3 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “fraud detection state 2” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 2” indicates fraud detection information for opening the glass plate when “1”. Bit 1 represents fraud detection information for opening the frame body when “1”. Bit 2 represents fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 3 represents fraud detection information of the proximity sensor abnormality when “1”. Bit 4 represents fraud detection information for detecting a prize ball goto when “1”. Here, the “goto” is an illegal act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a pachinko or slot machine. Bit 5 represents fraud detection information for complex goth detection when “1”. Bit 6 represents fraud detection information for fraud addition detection when “1”. Bit 7 represents fraud detection information for door / frame opening detection (nighttime) when “1”.

  “Injustice detection information 1” is data indicating information on the detection of the winning ball sensor got (number of winning inconsistent balls). The “fraud detection information 1” is valid when Bit 4 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. The “injustice detection information 2” is data indicating information of composite sensor goto detection (launch / OUT inconsistent ball number). That is, it is data indicating information when an inconsistency between the number of shot balls and the number of out balls (the number of balls passing through the outlet) is detected. The “fraud detection information 2” is valid when Bit 5 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 3” is data indicating information of fraud addition detection (number of fraud addition balls). The “fraud detection information 3” is valid when Bit 6 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. The “fraud detection information 4” is data indicating information on the number of times the frame body is opened at night. The “fraud detection information 4” is valid when the Bit 7 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”.

  “Addition sequence number” is a sequence number for addition, and the addition sequence number received at the time of addition request is notified as it is. However, there is no response when the continuity of the added serial number is not established.

  The “game information” is information on the P device 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P device 2, and “number of game information”, “type information 1” to “type information n”. ”,“ Prize ball information 1 ”to“ Prize ball information n ”.

  The “number of game information” is the number (n) of type information / prize ball information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). The type information is data type information from Bit 4 to Bit 7 and indicates the data type of the game information. When it is “0”, there is no information, when it is “1”, when it is “2”, it is a big prize opening. “3” is the winning opening, and “4” is the number of symbol stops. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data number information, which indicates the data number for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, each data number is indicated. .

  “Type information 1” to “Type information n” indicate game type information 1 to game type information n, respectively. “Prize ball information 1” to “Prize ball information n” are game prize ball information 1 to game prize ball. Information n is shown.

  Here, the prize ball information is information on the number of prize balls from Bit0 to Bit3, and indicates the number of prize balls at the time of winning for each data type of game information. When "" to "15", the data of the number of award balls are respectively represented. Bits 4 to 7 are information on the number of winnings, and indicate the number of winnings (cumulative) for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, data on the number of winnings is displayed. Each represents.

<< 11. Card insertion notification, 12. Card insertion response >>
A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This card insertion notification command notifies the P unit 2 of card insertion. In response to this card insertion notification, a response of the card insertion response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card insertion response is a response indicating that the card insertion notification has been received with respect to the CU3.

  The card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2 when the card is inserted, and “sequential number”, “command”, “card ID”, “card insertion time”, Data of “store code” and “SC board ID” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “card ID” is identification ID information of the IC card inserted into the CU 3 and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2. “Card insertion time” is the time when the IC card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309 (see FIG. 1) of CU3. The year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, and the day information is two digits. The data is DD, time information is represented by two digits hh, minute information is represented by two digits mm, and second information is represented by two digits ss. The card insertion time is used to determine whether the game ball held by the P stand 2 is the current day ball or the past ball.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3 is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2. It is also used to determine whether or not the CU3 has been moved to the store. The CU 3 stores a store code where the CU 3 is installed. The store code is added to the security board 325 and notified to the P units. “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying CU3, and is used to determine whether or not CU3 has been replaced. The SC board ID is notified by adding information from the security board 325 to the P board 2. The payout control unit 171 of the P table 2 stores information notified by the card insertion notification command such as the card ID (C-ID) and the card insertion time.

  The response of the card insertion response notifies the CU 3 that the card insertion notification has been normally received, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 13. Card return notice, 14. Card return response >>
A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This card return notification command notifies the P unit 2 of a card return. In response to this card return notification, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to CU3.

  The card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2 of the card return, and the CU 3 transmits the notification when the “card return” button is pressed. The card return notification includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response to the card return response is to send a response to the card return notification to the CU 3 and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time”. “Serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. Note that CU3 does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the card currently being inserted or if there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , And processing such as prohibiting the writing of the holding ball to the card.

  Here, the operation of the P stand 2 at the time of card insertion notification or card return notification will be described. At the time of card insertion notification, if the CU 3 performs a membership card insertion, a general card insertion, or a deposit to a general 0 yen 0 coin card, the P stand 2 backs up the card ID and the card insertion time. When an operation of pressing the “card return” button is performed on the CU 3 at the time of the card return notification, the P stand 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time.

<< 15. Communication test request, 16. Communication test response >>
A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2 of test data. In response to this communication test request, a response of the communication test response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to CU3.

  The communication test request command notifies the P unit 2 of test data. Note that the test data notified to the P platform 2 is not encrypted. The communication test request command includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the P base 2 and is arbitrary data.

  The response of the communication test response notifies the CU 3 of test data. Note that the test data notified to the CU 3 is not encrypted. The response of the communication test response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the CU 3 and is arbitrary data.

<Main sequence in communication between CU and P platform>
<< Send command and response >>
First, transmission of commands and responses between the CU 3 and the P base 2 will be described. A command is transmitted from CU3 (primary station) to P station 2 (secondary station), and P station 2 returns a response to CU3 in response to the command. In other words, the business message transmission is a command / response system in which the CU 3 is the primary station and the P stand 2 is the secondary station.

  The period from the transmission of the first command to the P unit 2 from the CU 3 to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted between the CU 3 and the P base 2 at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, by operating the hitting operation handle 25, the P platform 2 hits 100 pachinko balls into the game area 27 per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are sequentially transmitted from the P platform 2 to the CU 3 at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P stand 2 can finely notify the CU 3 of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be a firing time interval of the P platform 2. It is also possible to match with

<< Communication line disconnection detection on CU side >>
Next, processing when communication disconnection is detected on the CU3 side will be described. When the response is not received within 200 ms after the CU 3 transmits a command to the P unit 2, the same command is transmitted to the P unit 2 again. Further, if a response cannot be received within 200 ms, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to the P unit 2. Resend the same command to P-unit 2 up to 14 times. If the response is not received from the P-unit 2 even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3 determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds and sets “communication interruption”. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector of the CU 3 and the connector of the P base 2 are disconnected, or the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the P base 2 is disconnected. CU3 does not increment the serial number when retransmitting the command.

<< Communication line disconnection detection on P side >>
Processing when communication disconnection is detected on the P platform 2 side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 returns a response to the CU 3 in response to the command. Thereafter, when the state in which the command from the CU 3 is not transmitted to the P stand 2 continues for 3 seconds, the P stand 2 determines that the communication is cut off, stops the driving of the firing motor 18 and stops the game. The cause of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the connector of CU3 and the connector of P base 2, disconnection of connection wiring, or power supply disconnection of CU3.

  It should be noted that the command and response for detecting communication disconnection on the P platform 2 side include recovery request / recovery response, recovery request 2 / recovery response 2, communication start request / communication start response, notification end request / communication end response, and communication Does not include test request / communication test response command and response.

<< Power-on >>
Next, connection sequence processing at power-on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 7 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3 and the P platform 2 is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU 3 is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off at the amusement hall after one day of business is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, communication is started after the firing motor 18 is stopped on the P stand 2 to stop the game. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number and the previous last transmission count sequence number to the P unit 2 and requests recovery information from the P unit 2. The P unit 2 refers to the previous last transmission count sequence number notified from the CU 3 and executes count recovery processing. Specifically, the P-unit 2 refers to the last transmission count sequence number last time, and if the CU 3 has not performed the counting process, it is assumed that no counting request has been made, and if the CU 3 has already performed the counting process, Subtract the number of balls from the previous number of game balls to determine the game balls.

  After executing the count recovery process, the P table 2 returns the game information recovery data backed up inside the P table 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes a previous last transmission sequence number, a previously inserted card ID, a previous card insertion time, a previous last transmission addition sequence number, a previous game machine information, and the like.

  When the CU3 that has received the recovery response has not executed the process of the last transmission addition serial number included in the recovery information, the CU3 performs the additional recovery process of the CU3 using the previous game machine information included in the recovery information. When the addition ball recovery process is performed, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request 2 to the P base 2 and transmits recovery data to the P base 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P platform 2 executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and returns the result as a response to the CU 3 (recovery response 2). When the P stand 2 cannot receive the additional balls, the recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 and is not only executed at power-on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU 3 counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2 receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3 has retransmitted the command. The CU 3 transmits a command, and backs up the serial number when a response with the same serial number is notified from the P unit 2. When transmitting the response corresponding to the received command, the P platform 2 notifies the CU 3 of the received serial number as it is. The P unit 2 backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request command to the P unit 2 with the serial number “1”. The P platform 2 returns the received serial number “1” as it is to the CU 3 as a response to the recovery response. Further, the CU 3 transmits the command of the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2 with the serial number “2”. The P base 2 returns the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3 as it is with the received serial number “2”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 counts up the serial number to “3”, and transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2. When the CU 3 does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is “2” which is one countdown (−1). In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3 with the received serial number “3”. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  The CU 3 counts up the serial number to “4”, and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 updates the game table information, the game information, and the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the updated data every time a response of the status information response is transmitted. Then, the P platform 2 returns the response of the status information response to the CU 3 with the received serial number “4”.

  In response to this, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission sequence number, and backs up the updated data every time a response to the status information response is received.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 counts up the serial number to “5” and transmits a status information request command to the P base 2, and the P base 2 sends the response of the status information response to the CU 3 with the received serial number “5”. Reply to

<< Card insertion >>
Processing of the CU 3 and the P stand 2 when a card is inserted will be described. The CU 3 shown in FIG. 8 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2 before card insertion. In response to this, the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n and the game prohibition to the CU 3.

  Thereafter, in CU3, when the card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID, etc.) recorded in the taken-in card. A process at the time of card insertion, such as receiving the read information, is executed.

  The CU 3 is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the middle of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the amusement hall, or inquiring the hall server 801 about the holding ball, storage ball, remaining card amount, etc. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312 and the display on the display 54 on the P platform 2 side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3 does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312, the status information request including the serial number = n + 1 and the card insertion state = OFF is requested. A command is transmitted to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU3. The display 54 on the P platform 2 side is controlled by the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 to display that the card is being inquired.

  After that, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3 stores the card ID and the card insertion time of the card in the RAM of the CU control unit 323, and includes the serial number = n + 2, the card ID, and the card insertion time. An insertion notification command is transmitted to the P unit 2. Note that the card insertion notification command also includes the store code and SC board ID added by the security board 325. In response to this, the P unit 2 backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data in the RAM of the payout control unit 171 and a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 2 Is returned to CU3. Also in CU3, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of the CU control unit 323.

  In response to this, the CU 3 sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 3 and a card insertion state = ON to the P base 2 to notify the P base 2 of the card insertion status. The P table 2 receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the game permission to the CU3, thereby indicating that the game is being permitted. To notify.

  While the card is being inserted, CU3 sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 4 and card insertion status = ON to P unit 2, and P unit 2 returns a response of status information response including serial number = n + 4 and game permission. Reply to CU3.

<< Prepaid loan >>
Next, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 9, the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, the CU 3 lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed, the CU 3 confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of added balls = 125. In this way, the remaining amount consumption is determined by the CU 3 alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, CU3 is in the display of addition. During the addition display, the display unit 54 displays that 125 balls are withdrawn from the remaining amount and added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3 makes a game ball addition request to the P stand 2. Therefore, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2. The serial number is incremented to “n + 1” and the addition number of game balls is requested, so that the additional serial number is also incremented to “m + 1”. The CU 3 counts up the addition sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition sequence number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response to this, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” last time. Back up the data. And since the P stand 2 notifies CU3 of the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK, the serial number = n + 1, the number of addition balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and is set to “m + 1” as it is.

  Thereafter, CU3 transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, P unit 2 has serial number = n + 5, number of additional balls = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to CU3. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the status information request and the status information response count up the serial number, but do not count up the additional serial number.

≪Mochitama payout and savings ball payout (replay) ≫
Next, the process of paying out and holding out the stored balls will be described. In FIG. 10, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319 in a state where there is a holding ball or a storage ball, the CU 3 determines the consumption of 125 balls from the holding ball or the storage ball. As described above, the consumption of the possession balls or the storage balls is determined by the CU 3 alone when the operation of depressing the possession ball payout button or the replay button 319 is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button.

  CU3 notifies the addition request | requirement of the number of addition balls = 125 to the P stand 2 after confirming the consumption from a holding ball or a storage ball. Specifically, CU3 displays that a game ball addition process is in progress, and issues a status information request command including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125, and addition serial number = m + 1. Transmit to P-station 2. In order to make a game ball addition request, the serial number is counted up to “n + 1”, and the additional serial number is also counted up to “m + 1”. Further, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. In response to this, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” last time. Back up the data. And the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of additional balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the additional serial number = m + 1 to the CU3. Since this is a response to a game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and remains “m + 1”.

  Thereafter, CU3 transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, P unit 2 has serial number = n + 2, number of additional balls = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to CU3.

<< Game Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, the normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 11 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, the card return ready state bits transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 are all OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  Also, in FIG. 11, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. Yes.

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  In response to the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P unit 2. The same counting sequence number m is returned from the P base 2 to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 3. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28. In FIG. 11, immediately after the operation of pressing the count button 28 once, a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 1, a card return ready state = OFF, a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF is sent from the CU3. It has been transmitted to the P stand 2.

  When the operation of the counting button 28 is detected, the P platform 2 transmits a status information response of the serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request to the CU 3. However, at this stage, the P base 2 does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a message indicating a counting request, the counting sequence number is counted up to “m + 1”. At this time, the P unit 2 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number and backs up the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data.

  CU3 which received the status information response of serial number n + 1 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323 transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350. The display controller 350 receives the command and controls the display 54 on the P platform 2 side. As a result, the display 54 displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number of balls is decreased, while the number of balls is increased.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the number of balls to the number of balls, and various display effects.

  Further, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3 transmits a status information request of serial number n + 2, counting serial number m + 1, and counting response = ON to the P base 2 to notify that the requested counting has been completed.

  The P table 2 that has received this status information request finally subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display on the game ball number display 29 from 800 to 700. At this stage, the count request state of the P base 2 is OFF, but since the count button is continuously pressed, the P base 2 transmits a second count request to the CU 3. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3. However, even at this stage, the P base 2 does not perform counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 700. Since this status information response is a message transmitted as a new count request, the count sequence number is incremented to “m + 2”, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number is updated. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  CU3 which received the status information response of serial number n + 2 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls, and updates the display of balls to 200. Further, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3 transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 3, a count serial number m + 2, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2 to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  The P table 2 that has received this status information request subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29 from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P platform 2 notifies the CU 3 of the completion of counting with a status information response of serial number n + 3. That is, with the current number of game balls = 600, a status information response of count request = OFF and count ball count = 0 is transmitted to CU3. In addition, since all the counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting sequence number included in this status information response remains m + 2 and is not updated.

  The CU 3 that has received this status information response determines that the counting is complete. Although not shown, the CU 3 transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return ready state = OFF, and counting response = OFF to the P base 2.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. In the stage where the information status response for notifying the number of balls is transmitted and the receipt confirmation is received from the CU, the P machines subtract the game balls.

<< game ball count (count NG) >>
Next, a case where the counting process is NG in the counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 12 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, the card return ready state bits transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 are all OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  Further, in FIG. 12, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. Yes.

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  In response to the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P unit 2. The same counting sequence number m is returned from the P base 2 to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 3. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28. In FIG. 12, immediately after an operation of pressing the count button 28 once, a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 1, a card return ready state = OFF, a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF is sent from the CU3. It has been transmitted to the P stand 2.

  When the operation of the counting button 28 is detected, the P platform 2 transmits a status information response of the serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request to the CU 3. However, at this stage, the P base 2 does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Further, since this status information response is a message transmitted in response to the counting request, the P table 2 counts up the counting sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the last transmission counting sequence number last time, and updates the previous time. Back up the data of the last transmission counting sequence number and counting request status ON.

  CU3 which received the status information response of the serial number n + 1 normally adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 100. However, when the CU 3 cannot receive the status information response from the P table 2 due to a communication error or the like and cannot receive the counting ball, it returns a count reception NG to the P table 2. Specifically, the CU 3 transmits a status information request of serial number n + 2, counting serial number m, and counting response = OFF to the P platform 2 to notify that the requested counting ball has not been received. Since the CU 3 has not received the requested counting ball, the CU 3 transmits a status information request with the previous last transmission counting sequence number m as the counting sequence number without updating the previous last transmitting counting sequence number.

  The P table 2 that has received this status information request counts down the last transmission count number by one (-1) without subtracting the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls = 100, and Back up your data. At this stage, since the count button continues to be pressed, the P platform 2 transmits a second count request to the CU 3. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3. However, even at this stage, the P base 2 does not perform counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 800. In addition, since this status information response is a count request again, the count sequence number is set to m + 1 which is the same as the previous time, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data Back up.

  In response to this, the CU 3 returns a count reception NG to the P base 2. Specifically, the CU 3 transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 3, a counting serial number m, and a counting response = OFF to the P platform 2 to notify the rejection of the request. Since the CU 3 rejects the request, the CU 3 does not update the previous last transmission count sequence number, but transmits the status information request with the previous last transmission count sequence number m as the count sequence number.

  The P table 2 that has received this status information request counts down the last transmission count number by one (-1) without subtracting the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls = 100, and Back up your data. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 with a status information response of the counting OFF state number n + 3. That is, a status information response of the count request = OFF and the count ball count = 0 is transmitted to the CU 3 together with the current game ball count = 800.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. However, since the P units are subtracting the game balls at the stage of receiving the information confirmation response from the CU after transmitting the information status response notifying the number of counted balls, the counting recovery process is performed in the case of counting NG. There is no need to do it.

<< Game Ball Count (Card Return) >>
Next, the game ball counting process when returning the card will be described. FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the player performs a card return operation. In FIG. 13, the number of card possessions specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is 0, and the initial number of game balls is 800. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card return preparation state = OFF, a counting sequence number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the game or moves to another game table, the player presses the “card return” button. However, at the time when the player presses the “card return” button, the number of game balls in the P unit 2 is 800 balls, and the CU 3 determines that the number of game balls in the P unit 2 is not 0. In addition, since the player presses the “card return” button, the CU 3 sets the card return ready state = ON, the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the CU opening state = ON, the counting sequence number = m, and the counting response = OFF. A command is transmitted to the P unit 2. Note that the CU 3 notifies the P stand 2 of the card return preparation state = ON notification for 10 seconds. Furthermore, since the number of game balls in the P stand 2 is 800 balls and not 0 balls, the CU 3 displays a display for prompting a counting operation on the display 54 or the like as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player presses the counting button 28 to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. The P stand 2 determines that the counting operation for depressing the counting button 28 is a counting operation with the card return preparation state = ON, and processes the counting in a lump instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify the CU 3 of the counting ball number 800 balls obtained by batch counting the 800 ball balls, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 1, a game ball number = 800, a counting serial number = The response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3. However, at this stage, the P base 2 does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a count request message, the P platform 2 counts up the count sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and updates the previous last transmission count sequence number. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, CU3 adds 800 counting balls to the number of holding balls, and subtracts 800 counting balls from 800 gaming balls to 0. Further, the CU 3 backs up the data of the updated last transmission count sequence number. Then, in order to notify receipt of the counting ball, the CU 3 sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU opening state = ON, card return preparation state = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = ON. Send to.

  In response to the response from the CU 3, the P stand 2 subtracts 800 counting balls from the 800 gaming balls and displays 0 gaming balls on the display 54 or the like. Further, the P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 that the number of game balls is 0 and the counting is completed, so that the sequence number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 0, the count sequence number = m + 1, the count ball number = 0, and the count request = OFF. A response of the status information response including is returned to CU3. Since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting sequence number remains m + 1 and is transmitted to CU3 without counting up.

  CU3 counts the number of game balls by pressing the count button 28 and counting the number of game balls in a lump before 10 seconds have elapsed since the player pressed the card return button 322, that is, in the card return preparation state. Card is returned to 0, so card return processing is executed. That is, the CU 3 transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 3 to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card return response including the serial number = n + 3, the card ID held on the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time to the CU 3. After returning the card ID and the card insertion time to the CU 3, the card ID and the card insertion time data held on the payout control board 17 are cleared.

  In response, the CU 3 determines whether the card ID stored in the inserted card and the card ID received from the P-unit 2 match, and if they match, returns the inserted card. If they do not match, error processing is performed and reported to the hall server 801 or the like. When the card IDs match, the CU 3 stores the number of balls 800 in the card (inserted card) that has been inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 and returns the card to the player. Further, when the player has started the game by depositing without inserting the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309, the card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section provided in CU3 Store the number of balls 800 and return the card to the player. When the inserted card or stock card is returned, the CU 3 transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801, and the hall server 801 associates the card ID of the card with the data of the number of balls. May be stored.

  Thereafter, in order to notify the P stand 2 of the card insertion state OFF, the CU 3 requests a status information request including a serial number = n + 4, a CU opening state = ON, a card insertion state = OFF, a counting serial number = m + 1, and a counting response = OFF. A command is transmitted to the P unit 2. In response to this, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4, the number of gaming balls = 0, the counting serial number = m + 1, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2.

  Note that the sequence of the game ball counting process when returning the card described with reference to FIG. 13 is not limited to when the card is returned, and the same process can be applied during simple leaving and meal breaks. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order to allow the player to make a small use. A meal break is a meal or break that is interrupted by a game such as 30 minutes longer than a simple leave.

<< Abnormal Sequence 1 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information request is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption. In particular, FIG. 14 shows that there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P base 2 is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information request has not arrived (from CU3 to the P base 2). FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram for explaining a counting process in a case where a command has not arrived) and communication partners after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 14, CU 3 transmits a status information request including serial number = n to P unit 2 before the power interruption occurs during the game. In response to this, in order to notify the gaming machine information CU3, the P machine 2 transmits a status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU3. . The P table 2 updates the previous last transmission serial number as the previous game table information to “n”.

  CU3 receives the status information response of serial number = n, updates the previous last transmission serial number to “n”, and backs up. Further, based on the information of the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls stored therein are updated.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the P stand 2 during the game, when a status information request including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2, the P stand 2 is in a power cut off state. Status information request cannot be received. Thereafter, since the status information response from the P stand 2 is not transmitted, the CU 3 performs control to detect and stop the communication line disconnection after 3 seconds. From the time when the P table 2 transmits the response of the status information response to the CU 3 until the power interruption occurs, the game is continued in the P table 2 and the game table information is changed. The number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6. Number of balls to be subtracted = 36, which is the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  Thereafter, the power failure of the P stand 2 is restored and the P stand 2 starts to operate. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800 via the hall server 801), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the last last transmission serial number = n to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the last final transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request is equal to the last final transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17). Determine whether you are doing it. If they match, it can be determined that the last status information response sent from the P-unit 2 to the CU3 before the communication interruption has reached the CU3. In this case, the status information response is included in the status information response. The game information is updated on the CU 3 side based on the game information to be played. For this reason, in this case, a recovery response (serial number = 1) is returned to the CU 3 as no gaming information storage (specifically, no previous gaming machine information). If the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request does not match the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17), the communication is interrupted. Since it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3 before the CU 3 has not reached the CU 3, in this case, the game information is stored (specifically, the previous game stand information) A recovery response (sequence number = 1) including game information is returned to CU3.

  In FIG. 14, CU3 does not perform the addition recovery process because there is no game information stored in the recovery response. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since there is no game information storage, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P base 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (the number of game balls as the latest game table information = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Update the last transmission serial number and back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. In response to the status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission serial number and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal sequence 2 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information response has not yet reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption. FIG. 15 particularly shows that there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of P stand 2 is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not reached (from P stand 2 to CU 3). FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram for explaining a counting process in a case where a command has not arrived) and communication partners after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 15, after a power failure occurs during a game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2 to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3 is not transmitted, the P stand 2 performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 transmits a stop command to the firing control board 31, and the firing control board 31 stops the rotational drive of the firing motor 18. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued in the P table 2 and the game table information is changed, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which becomes the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  On the other hand, CU3 performs control to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player because the power is cut off. At that time, the number of balls currently held is stored in the card and discharged. If the number of possessed balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU or the like, the hall server 801 periodically receives the number of retained balls from the CU 3 (for example, every 5 seconds) and stores it in a backup manner. The loss may be compensated for by the player based on the stored data (the number of balls). Thereafter, the power-off of the CU 3 is restored, and the CU 3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800 via the hall server 801), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, in the P base 2, the previous last transmission sequence number of the received recovery request = n−1, and the last final transmission sequence number backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) = n Are compared. As a result, since they do not match, it is determined that the state information response transmitted last before the occurrence of the power interruption has not reached CU3. Therefore, the P stand 2 returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including the game information storage presence (specifically, the previous game stand information presence) to the CU 3 as having unreported game information to the CU 3. To do. That is, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, which are the previous game table information, are included in the recovery response and transmitted to the CU3.

  The CU 3 executes the recovery process based on the game information included in the recovery response. However, since the game ball addition request is not transmitted immediately before the communication line disconnection is detected, the addition recovery process is unnecessary. For this reason, after receiving the recovery response, the communication start request is transmitted without transmitting the recovery request 2. The CU 3 executes a first check process before transmitting this communication start request. In the first check process, whether or not the number of game balls included in the game machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response by the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response is an appropriate value Is checked. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. Note that the CU 3 processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, in the P-unit 2, the unreported game table information (the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls) included in the state information response that did not reach the CU 3 before the power failure occurred. = 36) is notified to the CU 3 by a status information response, and the last transmission serial number is updated last time to back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. In response to the status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission serial number and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the card ID of the reinserted card is properly read by the card information reading process, whether the read card ID matches the card ID included in the recovery response or not Is determined by the CU control unit 323 of the CU3, and the insertion time of the card inserted at the start of the game before the power interruption occurs is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323, and the stored card insertion time and recovery are stored. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 may determine whether or not the card insertion times included in the response match. In this case, it is determined that both match, and if there is no addition recovery, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3.

  In this embodiment, a card ID and a card insertion time are used as player specifying information that can specify a player when determining the identity of the player. This card ID includes not only the card ID of the member card that identifies the individual player of the member but also the card ID of the visitor card used by the player who visited the store as a visitor. In the case of this visitor card, it is used for an unspecified player and does not specify a specific player individual. That is, in the case of this card ID, whether the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line disconnection and the player who intends to play the game after the power interruption is restored are the same player. It can be specified whether or not, but it cannot be specified to which specific individual the player is. Therefore, the above “player identification information” is not limited to identifying a specific individual player, and the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line interruption and the game after the power interruption recovery is performed. It is a broad concept that includes information that can be used to determine the identity of the player who is trying to correct.

<< Abnormal sequence 3 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, another recovery process of the number of game balls when the status information response is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. In particular, FIG. 16 shows that there is a power disconnection / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of CU3 is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not reached (command from P stand 2 to CU3). It is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner after recovery is unmatched. This power OFF / ON can also be turned OFF / ON, for example, by failure of the CU3, manually turning the power OFF / ON, or by inserting / removing the CU3 from / from the card unit holder.

  Referring to FIG. 16, after a power interruption occurs during a game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2 to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3 is not transmitted, the P stand 2 performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 transmits a stop command to the firing control board 31, and the firing control board 31 stops the rotational drive of the firing motor 18. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued in the P table 2 and the game table information is changed, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which becomes the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  On the other hand, CU3 performs control to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player because the power is cut off. Thereafter, the power failure of the CU 3 is restored and the power is turned on, and the CU 3 is replaced and a new CU 3 starts operating.

  In addition, when CU3 which was operating before CU replacement has stored the number of balls, the number of balls may be stored in another card (for example, a card inside the CU) and discharged. At that time, if the number of balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU, etc., the number of balls is received regularly from the CU3 (for example, every 5 seconds) and stored in a backup. The player may be compensated for the loss based on the data stored in the server 801 (the number of holding balls).

  When the exchanged CU3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU3. Is done. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800 via the hall server 801), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. However, since CU3 has been exchanged, it does not have a previous last transmission serial number. In response to this, the P-unit 2 returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including game information storage presence to the CU 3 as having unreported game information with respect to the CU 3. The recovery information notified to the CU 3 by this recovery response includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n, the card ID of the inserted card, the card insertion time, the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m, and the previous game machine information. . The previous game table information includes the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. CU3 performs recovery processing (game balls = 480, cumulative ball count = + 3, subtractive ball count = + 23) using the previous game machine information received from P machine 2, and sets the last transmission serial number of the previous game. Update and back up the data, card ID, and card insertion time. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. Upon receiving a status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3 waits for insertion of a card that was being inserted last time or waits for a store clerk remote control operation (game ball count). When a card is inserted in this state, the CU 3 reads the ID of the inserted card with a card reader / writer. Then, it is determined whether or not the read card ID matches the recovery card ID stored based on the recovery response (the card ID of the previously inserted card). If it is determined that they match, the store clerk waits for a remote control operation to resume the game. If there is a remote control operation, a card insertion notification command including the store code and the SC board ID is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. The P unit 2 backs up the store code and SC board ID data received at the time of the previous card insertion before the communication interruption to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171 and is transmitted from the backed up data and the CU3. The store code and the SC board ID are compared to determine whether or not they match. If they match, the game can be resumed. Note that a card insertion notification command including a store code and an SC board ID may be transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 without waiting for a remote control operation. In the case of mismatch, error processing such as invalidating the game ball number data of the P unit 2 is performed, for example. Alternatively, an error notification may be made instead of or in addition to this. Further, it may be controlled to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal sequence 4 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition request is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 17 explains the counting process when the addition request has not yet reached due to power interruption or communication line disconnection (addition request command from CU3 to P stand 2 has not reached) and the communication partners after recovery match. FIG.

  In FIG. 17, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At this time, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of balls to be added = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the command for requesting the state information, the P stand 2 is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3.

  CU3 cannot retransmit the response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because P-station 2 is stopped, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P machine 2 returns the recovery information backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command. Here, the last last transmission addition serial number = m is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previous last transmission addition sequence number of the recovery information matches the stored previous last transmission addition sequence number. When CU3 has a larger value (newer) than the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in CU3 being backed up compared to the final transmission addition sequence number = m of the recovery data of P unit 2 (mismatch) Then, it is determined that the previous status information request command has not been reached, and the addition recovery process is performed.

  As a specific addition recovery process, recovery of the number of added balls = 125 balls is requested to the P unit 2. Therefore, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request 2 (number of balls to be added = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P unit 2.

  The P table 2 performs an addition process to the number of balls to be added included in the recovery request 2, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the data. At this timing, an addition process that has not been realized due to power-off is realized, and the number of game balls matches on the CU3 side and the P stand 2 side. Further, the P platform 2 returns a response 2 indicating that the addition processing is OK to the CU 3 (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). CU3 which received it clears the addition request state. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 2 that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the above-described recovery response is an appropriate value. The third check process for checking is executed. This third check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3. Further, the CU 3 transmits a status information request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 175) as a status information response. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 5 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition response is not reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 18 particularly illustrates the counting process when the addition response has not yet reached (the response to the addition response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 has not yet reached) due to power interruption or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match. FIG.

  In FIG. 18, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At this time, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of balls to be added = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in the CU 3. In order for the P unit 2 to detect a communication line disconnection, a period in which the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or longer is required.

  For this reason, the P unit 2 does not know that the operation of the CU3 is stopped, receives the command for requesting the status information of the CU3, the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the addition serial number. Response of the status information response including = m + 1 is returned to CU3. However, the response of the status information response sent back to CU3 does not reach CU3 because the operation of CU3 is stopped. The P machine 2 returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3, updates the last transmission addition serial number last time, and backs up the updated data and the number of game balls = 175.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the last final transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). (Previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, Previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1)). The recovery information includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and CU3 matches the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of P unit 2 and the last final transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in CU3, the addition recovery Clear the addition request state without requesting processing. In addition, the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as a recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P base 2 returns a communication start response to the CU 3.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal Sequence 6 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition response is not reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 19 particularly illustrates the counting process when the addition response has not reached (the response to the addition response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 has not reached) due to power interruption or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match. FIG.

  In FIG. 19, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At this time, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of balls to be added = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in the CU 3. In order for the P unit 2 to detect a communication line disconnection, a period in which the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or longer is required.

  For this reason, the P unit 2 receives the command for requesting the status information of the CU3 and processes the addition request without knowing that the operation of the CU3 is stopped. However, for some reason (for example, the number of game balls has reached the upper limit), a situation in which game balls cannot be added occurs. In this case, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50, the game ball addition result = NG and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3. However, the response of the status information response sent back to CU3 does not reach CU3 because the operation of CU3 is stopped. In addition, since the game ball addition abnormality has occurred in the P unit 2, the addition ball from the CU 3 cannot be processed, and the previous last transmission addition serial number = m is not updated.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. In addition, in P stand 2, it is in the state of game ball addition abnormality. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the last final transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). (Previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, Previous last transmission addition sequence number = m)). The recovery information includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last last transmission addition sequence number = m.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and CU3 does not match the last transmission addition sequence number = m of the recovery data of P unit 2 and the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in CU3, the addition recovery Request processing. For this reason, the CU 3 transmits the recovery request 2 including the last final transmission addition serial number = m + 1 and the number of additional balls = 125 to the P unit 2.

  In response to this, the P stand 2 notifies the recovery response 2 that the game ball addition is not processed (game ball addition NG) due to the game ball addition abnormality. The recovery response 2 includes recovery result = processing NG.

  CU3 which received it performs the 3rd check mentioned later. Further, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P base 2 returns a communication start response to the CU 3.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including the game ball addition request = ON, the number of addition balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2 in order to notify the P unit 2 of the addition request again. Receiving this, the P stand 2 is in an addition abnormal state, and transmits a state information response including the number of game balls = 50, a game ball addition result = NG, and an addition sequence number = m to the CU 3. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 7 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition request has not been reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 20 explains the counting process when the addition request has not yet reached due to power interruption or communication line disconnection (addition request command from CU3 to P unit 2 has not reached) and the communication counterparts after restoration do not match. FIG.

  In FIG. 20, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At this time, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of balls to be added = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the command for requesting the state information, the P stand 2 is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3.

  CU3 cannot retransmit the response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because P-station 2 is stopped, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 is further replaced and the new P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained. Note that the CU 3 performs addition recovery even when the P stand 2 is replaced.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P machine 2 returns the recovery information backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command. However, since the P base 2 is newly exchanged, the previous last transmission addition serial number is not backed up, and the initial value “0” is transmitted to the CU 3.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previous last transmission addition sequence number of the recovery information matches the stored previous last transmission addition sequence number. If the last transmission addition sequence number = 0 of the recovery data of P unit 2 and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3 being backed up do not match, CU3 has not issued a previous status information request command. It is determined that it has been reached, and addition recovery processing is performed. As a specific addition recovery process, recovery of the number of added balls = 125 balls is requested to the P unit 2. Therefore, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request 2 (number of balls to be added = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P unit 2.

  The P table 2 performs an addition process to the number of balls to be added included in the recovery request 2, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the data. Further, the P platform 2 returns a response 2 indicating that the addition processing is OK to the CU 3 (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). CU3 which received it clears the addition request state. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 2 that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the above-described recovery response is an appropriate value. The third check process for checking is executed. This third check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3. Further, the CU 3 transmits a status information request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 175) as a status information response. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 8 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls when the count response is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 21 particularly illustrates the counting process when the count response is not reached (the count response command from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 has not reached) due to power interruption or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match. FIG.

  In FIG. 21, the initial number of possessed balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a sequence number = n, a count sequence number = m, and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. Thereafter, in the P platform 2, the count button 28 is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU3. Specifically, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request = ON to the CU3. In addition, the P-unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the previous last transmission counting sequence number, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU 3 adds the number of balls to the number of balls and sets the number of balls to 100, updates the last transmission count sequence number last time, and backs up the updated data. However, after the P table 2 receives the status information request command, the power supply is cut off and the operation stops. For this reason, the P base 2 cannot receive a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the count serial number = m + 1, and the count response = ON from the CU 3. That is, in the P base 2, the count response from the CU 3 is not reached.

  CU3 cannot retransmit the response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because P-station 2 is stopped, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P machine 2 returns the recovery information backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command. Since the stored last previous transmission count sequence number = m + 1 and the previous last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 received from the CU 3 match, the P unit 2 performs a process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of game balls. Execute and turn off the counting request state. That is, the P stand 2 is updated from the number of game balls = 500 to the number of game balls = 400 at this time.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since CU3 does not perform addition recovery processing, CU3 transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to P unit 2 without transmitting recovery request 2 to P unit 2. Note that the CU 3 processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 400) as a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3 and number of game balls = 400. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal system 9 >>
Next, a recovery process for the number of counting balls when the count request is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 22 illustrates the counting process when the counting request has not yet reached (the command for counting request from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 has not reached) due to power interruption or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match. FIG.

  In FIG. 22, the initial number of possessed balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a sequence number = n, a count sequence number = m, and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. Thereafter, in the P platform 2, the count button 28 is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU3. Specifically, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request = ON to the CU3. In addition, the P-unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the previous last transmission counting sequence number, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  However, before the CU 3 receives the status information response command, the power is cut off and the operation stops. That is, CU2 has not yet reached the count request from P table 2. Thereafter, since the status information request from the CU 3 is not transmitted, the P stand 2 performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 transmits a stop command to the firing control board 31, and the firing control board 31 stops the rotational drive of the firing motor 18.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P machine 2 returns the recovery information backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command. The P-unit 2 does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of gaming balls because the stored last last transmission number sequence number = m + 1 and the last last transmission number sequence number = m received from the CU 3 do not match. The count request state is turned OFF. That is, the P table 2 cancels the count request transmitted immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption, and maintains the number of game balls = 500 at this time.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since CU3 does not perform addition recovery processing, CU3 transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to P table 2 without transmitting recovery request 2 to P table 2. Note that the CU 3 processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. Receiving it, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 500) by a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes a transmission sequence number = 3 and the number of game balls = 500. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal Sequence 10 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of counting balls when the counting response is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 23 particularly illustrates the counting process when the counting response is not reached (the counting response command from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 has not reached) due to power interruption or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match. FIG.

  In FIG. 23, the initial number of possessed balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a sequence number = n, a count sequence number = m, and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. Thereafter, in the P platform 2, the count button 28 is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU3. Specifically, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, the counting serial number m + 1, and the counting request = ON to the CU3. . In addition, the P-unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the previous last transmission counting sequence number, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU 3 executes a process of adding the number of balls to the number of balls, but some abnormality occurs and the addition process cannot be performed. For this reason, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a counting sequence number = m and a counting response = OFF (because of an abnormal counting state). However, after receiving the command for requesting the status information, the P base 2 has been powered off and has stopped operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3. That is, in the P base 2, the count response from the CU 3 is not reached.

  CU3 cannot retransmit the response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because P-station 2 is stopped, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P machine 2 returns the recovery information backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command. In the P unit 2, the stored last last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 and the last last transmission count sequence number received from the CU 3 are not equal to each other (m is not updated because of a count error). The process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of gaming balls is not executed, the counting request state is turned off, and the last last transmission counting number is decreased by 1 (−1). At this time, the P stand 2 cancels the count request before the occurrence of the power interruption and maintains the number of game balls = 500.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since CU3 does not perform addition recovery processing, CU3 transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to P table 2 without transmitting recovery request 2 to P table 2. Note that the CU 3 processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. Receiving it, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 500) by a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes a transmission sequence number = 3 and the number of game balls = 500. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Addition request error >>
Next, processing for abnormal addition request will be described. FIG. 24 is a sequence diagram for explaining the processing in particular when the result of adding game balls at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout is abnormal.

  In FIG. 24, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the possession payout button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of holding balls / storing balls, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2. Then, the information (addition number of balls = 125 balls) of converting the possession balls / storage balls into game balls is notified. At this time, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of add balls) = 175, the updated last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, an abnormality occurs in the process of adding game balls on the P platform 2. Therefore, upon receiving the CU3 status information request command, the P stand 2 sets the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), the game ball addition result = NG, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3. The P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 of the game ball addition result = NG and the last transmission addition serial number information.

  The CU3 that has received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = NG receives the command of the status information request including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. Resend to table 2. Note that CU3 retransmits the status information request command, but the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 1 to n + 2, and the additional serial number remains m + 1 and the status information request command is retransmitted.

  However, the P stand 2 remains in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command of CU3, the P platform 2 receives a serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), a game ball addition result = NG and an addition sequence number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to CU3.

  Further, the CU3 that has received the response of the state information response including the game ball addition result = NG again receives the status information request including the serial number = n + 3, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The command is retransmitted to P stand 2 for the second time. Although CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 2 to n + 3, and the status information request command is retransmitted with the addition sequence number remaining m + 1.

  P stand 2 is still in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command from CU3, the P stand 2 receives a serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), a game ball addition result = NG and an addition serial number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to CU3.

  Processing for adding a game ball in the P table 2 when the CU 3 receives a response of a response of a status information response including the game ball addition result = NG from the P table 2 even if the command for requesting the state information is retransmitted twice As a result, it becomes a state of waiting for addition abnormality recovery.

  After the addition abnormality is restored in the P unit 2, the CU 3 retransmits to the P unit 2 a status information request command including a serial number = n + X, a game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and an addition serial number = m + 1. . In the P 2, since the addition abnormality has been recovered, the addition processing to the game balls is performed and the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball addition) +125 (number of added balls) = 175 The last transmission addition serial number is updated and the data is backed up.

  After performing the addition processing to the game balls, the P stand 2 transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + X, the number of game balls = 175, the addition serial number = m + 1, and the game ball addition result = OK to the CU 3. In response to this, the CU 3 turns off the addition request state.

<Operation related to addition serial number>
FIG. 25 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P base 2 and the CU 3 regarding the addition serial number. When a game ball addition request is not generated, a message including a normal serial number and an addition serial number as shown in (1) to (4) of FIG.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and an additional serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. The P table 2 that has received the message (1) returns a message (2) that includes the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received message, as in (2).

  The CU 3 that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, addition sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. The P table 2 that has received the message (3) returns the message (4) including the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received message.

  As described above, every time the CU 3 receives a message from the P platform 2, the CU 3 updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2 does not update the normal serial number. Further, unless an addition request is generated, the addition sequence number is not updated.

  Next, when an addition request (due to a ball lending operation or a withdrawal operation for a stored ball) occurs, a request message of (5) in which one addition serial number is updated is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 (normal serial number n + 2). , Addition serial number m + 1). This request message includes data in which the addition request bit is turned ON. At this stage, the CU 3 has already confirmed the processing for the addition request (card balance withdrawal or savings withdrawal).

  The P platform 2 receives the request message (5) and recognizes the addition request based on the fact that one addition serial number has been updated from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current addition request. This determination is performed by, for example, the payout control unit 171 of the P stand 2. The payout control unit 171 determines whether or not processing for adding game balls is possible on the P platform 2 side. The case where the game ball addition process is not possible is, for example, a case where the game ball has already reached a predetermined upper limit value.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (6) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (6) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (5). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (6). The normal serial number is n + 2 included in the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message.

  The CU 3 includes an area for backup storage of the addition sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message, and an area for backup storage of the normal sequence number included in the reception message. These areas are provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the CU control unit 323 of the CU3. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the message (6) compares and determines the addition sequence number stored in the backup and the addition sequence number included in the message (6). As a result, if the stored addition sequence number is the same as the addition sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, when the transmitted addition serial number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (5) 'of FIG. 25 shows a case where the request message does not reach the P table 2 due to noise or other factors. In this case, since the P base 2 waits for a message from the CU 3, no message is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the request message (5) ′, and retransmits the same request message (5) ″ because there is no response from the P-unit 2.

<Operation related to counting serial number>
FIG. 26 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2 and the CU 3 regarding the counting sequence number. When the counting request is not generated, a message including a normal serial number and a counting serial number as shown in (1) to (3) of FIG.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and a counting serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. The P table 2 that has received the electronic message (1) returns the electronic message (2) including the same normal serial number n and the counting serial number m as the received electronic message, as shown in (2).

  The CU 3 that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, counting sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. As described above, every time the CU 3 receives a message from the P platform 2, the CU 3 updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2 does not update the normal serial number. Further, the counting sequence number is not updated unless a counting request is generated.

  Next, when a counting request (detection of counting operation) is generated, the request message (4) in which one counting sequence number is updated is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3 (normal sequence number n + 1, counting sequence number m + 1). ). This request message includes data in which the count request bit is turned ON. Note that the P platform 2 does not execute the counting process at this stage.

  The P table 2 receives the request message (4) and recognizes the counting request based on the fact that the counting sequence number has been updated by one from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current counting request. This determination is made, for example, by the CU control unit 323 of the CU3. The CU control unit 323 determines whether or not the counting process (the adding process of the holding balls) is possible. The case where the counting process is not possible is, for example, a case where the process using a holding ball (such as a wagon service) is in progress.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (5) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (5) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (4). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (4). The normal serial number is updated from the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message, and is n + 2.

  The P table 2 includes an area for backup storage of the counting sequence number and the normal sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. Such an area is provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the payout control unit 171 of the P table 2. The payout control unit 171 of the P table 2 that has received the message (5) compares and determines the count sequence number stored in the backup and the count sequence number included in the message (5). As a result, if the stored counting sequence number is the same as the counting sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, if the transmitted counting sequence number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (4) 'in FIG. 26 shows a case where the request message does not reach the P table 2 due to noise or other factors. In this case, the CU 3 waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the message (3), and retransmits the same message (3) because there is no response from the P platform 2. The P-station 2 that has received the retransmitted message (3) has the normal sequence number included in the message n + 1, and the normal sequence number is transmitted even though the request message (4) ′ has been transmitted first. Therefore, it is determined that the request message (4) ′ has not arrived. Then, the P platform 2 retransmits the same request message (4) ″ as (4) ′.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request sequence number (additional sequence number, counting sequence number) different from the normal sequence number is included in the message and transmitted. These request serial numbers are added and updated when an operation such as an addition request or a count request is requested to the communication partner, and otherwise, the addition and update are not performed even if a message is transmitted / received.

  On the other hand, the normal serial number is updated every time a message is transmitted from the CU 3 regardless of whether there is a request to the communication partner (the normal serial number is updated by both the CU 3 and the P unit 2). You may act.)

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, whether or not the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party can be determined using the serial number included in the received message from the other party, but is the received message an acknowledgment message indicating request acceptance? It cannot be specified whether the message is a rejection message indicating a request rejection.

  However, as described above, a request message with an updated request sequence number is transmitted using a request sequence number such as an addition sequence number or a counting sequence number as in this embodiment, and the request sequence number included in the request message as a response to this request message If a message containing the same request serial number is received, depending on the value of the serial number, not only whether the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party, but whether the message returned from the other party is an acceptance message. Can be specified. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request message includes data with the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) turned ON, the received message is an acceptance message even by determining this data. It is possible to identify whether the message is a rejection message. However, if the request sequence number is used, such request bits can be deleted from the message. As a result, the amount of message data can be reduced, and the processing for determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

  In this embodiment, the update value for the request sequence number when a request is generated is +1. However, this is an example, and other update values such as +2, +3, -1, and -2 are adopted. May be.

<First to third check processing>
Next, the first check process, the second check process, and the third check process executed by the CU control unit 323 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the first check process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 300, it is determined whether or not game table information is stored. This is to determine whether or not the gaming machine information is included in the recovery response transmitted from the P machine 2, and in the case of FIGS. 15 and 16, the gaming machine information (specifically, Is included in the previous game table information), YES is determined in S300. If it is determined that the game table information is not included, the first check process ends.

  If it is determined that there is storage of gaming machine information, the control proceeds to S301, and the added ball number included in the received gaming machine information (specifically, previous gaming machine information) is a predetermined threshold value. A determination is made whether N1 or greater. This threshold value N1 is the maximum number of game balls to be added during a period (200 ms) between the state information request and the state information response between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 (for example, the maximum addition ball at the time of big hit) It is set to a value (for example, 125) that is slightly larger than (Equation 120). Therefore, in the normal case, the received number of added balls should be smaller than the threshold value N1. However, the number of added balls larger than the threshold N1 means that the game table information including the number of added balls and the number of game balls illegally increased due to fraud etc. being performed on the P table 2 while offline is a recovery response. May be transmitted to CU3. In that case, the control advances to S304, and control for notifying the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312 is performed, and control for transmitting an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred to the hall server 801 is performed. (In this case, error notification may be performed by the hall server 801). Instead of or in addition to the hall server 801, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to S305, and the CU control unit 323 enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323 stops the control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The controller 323 is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 7).

  Even if an abnormality is determined as a result of the check processing in S301 and S303, the information stored on the CU3 side is that the cause is that the CU3 or the P stand 2 is replaced with a new one after communication disconnection, and then the communication is restored. And the information transmitted from the P base 2 during the recovery process may be completely different. Even though it is not such a fraudulent act, it may be determined that there is an abnormality, and for this reason, it is possible to cancel the reset waiting state by operating the remote control by the game hall staff, and intervene by human judgment by the game hall staff. So that they can respond normally.

  On the other hand, if NO is determined in S301, the control proceeds to S302, and the number of added balls received from the P units is added to the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323, and the number of subtracted balls is set. An operation for subtracting and calculating R1 as the calculation result is performed. That is, when it is determined that the number of added balls included in the game table information received from the P table 2 is appropriate, the latest number of game balls R1 is calculated using the added ball number and the subtracted ball number. It is calculated. Next, in S303, the calculated R1−the absolute value of the received game balls, that is, the difference between R1 and the received game balls is calculated, and whether or not the difference is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N2. Judgment is made. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility that an illegal act will occur as described above, and control proceeds to S304 and thereafter as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323.

  Next, the second check process will be described with reference to FIG. The number of balls to be added in the game table information (specifically, the current game table information) included in the status information response from the P table 2 returned in response to the status information request immediately after the communication start response is determined in advance. A determination is made in S310 as to whether or not it is equal to or greater than the threshold value N3. The number of added balls received is from the time when the P unit transmits a status information response to the CU3 until the power supply is interrupted to the P unit or until the game stops when the P unit detects a communication line disconnection. The number of added balls that fluctuated in (5) is such that the amount of change in the number of added balls within a relatively short limited period of time is not so large, but within a certain upper limit. Therefore, a value (for example, 125) slightly larger than the upper limit (for example, 120) is determined as the threshold value N3. If the number of added balls received is equal to or greater than the threshold value N3, the control proceeds to S314, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312 and an error occurs in the hall server 801. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to the effect (in this case, error notification by the hall server 801 may be performed). Instead of or in addition to the hall server 801, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to S315, and the CU control unit 323 enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323 stops the control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The controller 323 is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 7).

  On the other hand, if NO is determined in S310, the control advances to S311 to add the received addition ball number to the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323 and subtract the received subtraction ball number. Thus, an operation for calculating R2 is performed. The “stored number of game balls” referred to here is the number of game balls received from the P-unit 2 when NO is determined in S303 as described above. Then, in S312, it is determined whether or not the difference between the R2 and the number of game balls received from the P stand 2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value N4. Originally, R2 and the received number of game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N4. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N4, there is a possibility of fraudulent behavior as described above, and control proceeds to S314 and subsequent steps as described above.

  If NO is determined in S <b> 312, the control proceeds to S <b> 313, and the CU control unit 323 stores the number of game balls received from the P stand 2 as the initial number of game balls, and then performs the second check process. Control ends.

  After the processing of S313 is performed, normal status information requests and status information responses are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P base 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323 receives the initial value by S313. Using the number of game balls stored as the number of game balls as an initial value, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls, and transmitted from the P unit 2 based on the current number of game balls. It is determined whether or not the difference from the number of incoming game balls exceeds a predetermined error ball number (for example, 5), and if it exceeds, an abnormality is determined and the above-described S304, S305, S314, and S315 The same control is performed.

  Next, the control of the third check process will be described based on FIG. The CU control unit 323 executes the third check process immediately after receiving the recovery response 2 from the P base 2 (see FIGS. 17, 19, and 20).

  As described above, the recovery request 2 and the recovery response 2 are the game balls in which the P stand 2 complies with the game ball addition request even though the CU 3 outputs a game ball addition request to the P stand 2. This is for performing recovery of the number of game balls when the addition process is not performed. Then, the recovery result 2 sent from the P base 2 to the CU 3 notifies the processing result as to whether or not the addition recovery processing has been normally performed. In S320, the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not the recovery result is processing NG. If processing NG, that is, addition recovery is not performed normally, the control proceeds to S324, where control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312 and an error has occurred in the hall server 801. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to this effect (in this case, error notification by the hall server 801 may be performed). Instead of or in addition to the hall server 801, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to S325, and the CU control unit 323 enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323 stops the control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The controller 323 is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 7).

  On the other hand, if the recovery result is processing OK, the control advances to S321, and the CU control unit 323 performs processing for adding the number of added balls transmitted to the P unit 2 to the number of game balls currently stored. . This is because the addition recovery for the number of balls in the game ball addition request output by the CU 3 is normally performed in the P unit 2, so that the number of balls to be added is added to the number of game balls and the current normal game ball is This is a process for calculating the number.

  Next, the control advances to S322, and an operation is performed to calculate R3 by adding the number of added balls transmitted from the P unit 2 to the number of game balls after the addition and subtracting the number of subtracted balls. The number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are game machine information (specifically, previous game machine information) transmitted from the P machine 2 as a recovery response, and the previous game machine information is included in the recovery response. When there is no ball, the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are both zero, and as a result, the number of game balls after addition = R3 is calculated.

  Next, in S323, it is determined whether or not the difference between the calculated R3 and the number of game balls received by CU3 is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value N2. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility that an illegal act will occur as described above, and control proceeds to S324 and subsequent steps as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the CU control unit 323.

  As described above, the previous gaming machine information is transmitted first as gaming machine information from the P machine 2 to the CU 3, and then the gaming machine information is transmitted this time so that both gaming machine information can be distinguished on the CU 3 side. Since it is transmitted, the CU control unit 323 can determine the suitability of both pieces of game machine information. As a result, for example, the number of game balls in the previous game table information sent from the P table 2 should not be significantly different from the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323 at the present time, For example, the game ball number data in the current game table data sent thereafter is not so different from the game ball number data in the previous game table information received by the CU 3. If there is a large gap in the difference between these data, it can be determined that the game ball number data is illegally inflated.

  If the total data obtained by adding the previous game machine data and the current game data is collectively transmitted from the P machine 2 to the CU 3, compared to the case where the previous game machine data and the current game machine data are individually determined. Therefore, it is only possible to roughly discriminate, and accordingly it is difficult to discriminate fraud. In order to prevent such inconvenience, the game table data is transmitted in two stages so that the CU control unit 323 can distinguish between the two types of data, making it possible to perform detailed abnormality determination for each game table data. It is easy to distinguish.

  In the first check process to the third check process described above, after determining whether or not the number of balls to be added is appropriate, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of balls to be added when it is appropriate. The number of game balls is compared with the number of game balls transmitted from the P unit 2 to determine whether or not the number of game balls transmitted is appropriate, but it is simply transmitted from the P unit 2. The number of game balls may be compared with the number of game balls stored in the CU 3, and the suitability may be determined.

  Further, the CU 3 stores the final number of game balls stored before the recovery process (hereinafter referred to as “CU game ball number”) and the number of game balls in the previous game table information received from the P table 2 (hereinafter referred to as “P The number of game balls in the latest game table received from the P table 2 (hereinafter referred to as “P latest game ball number”) is determined by comparison between the three parties. You may make it perform determination. As a specific example of comparison between the three players, the number of CU gaming balls and the number of previous P balls are compared and determined. If correct, the previous number of P balls and the number of latest P balls are compared and determined. To do. Alternatively, the number of CU game balls and the number of previous P game balls are compared and determined, and if they are correct, the number of CU game balls and the latest number of P game balls are compared and determined. Furthermore, the P number of the previous game balls and the P number of the latest game balls are compared and determined first, and if they are correct, the CU game ball number and the P number of previous game balls are compared and determined. The latest number of game balls is compared and determined.

  The first check process to the third check process are preferably executed when the CU 3 and the P stand 2 are not exchanged (replaced). When exchange (replacement) is performed at the time of communication disconnection, the number of game balls on the CU side and the P stand side is generally greatly different in the recovery process. This is because an error is determined as a result of the check process to the third check process. Therefore, when the CU 3 or the P stand 2 is exchanged after the communication is disconnected, the first check process to the third check process may be controlled not to be performed in the recovery process when the communication is restored. Specifically, when the difference between the last last transmission sequence number transmitted from the P unit 2 as a recovery response and the last latest transmission sequence number stored in the CU control unit 323 is 2 or more, the CU 3 or the P unit 2 The CU control unit 323 determines that it has been replaced, and controls so that the CU control unit 323 does not perform the first check process to the third check process.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the CU 3 or the P stand 2 is exchanged, it may be controlled so that the previous game table data and the current game table data are not checked on the CU 3 side at the time of recovery. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the troublesomeness that the check abnormality determination due to the replacement of the CU 3 or the P stand 2 occurs.

<Main sequence in communication between SC and IC>
Next, FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining processing of a business message sequence between the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a. With reference to FIG. 29, the processing of SC 325b and communication control IC 325a after CU3 is powered on will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3 is turned on, the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a are activated. When activated, the SC 325b performs authentication with the CU control unit 323, and when activated, the communication control IC 325a performs authentication with a gaming machine (for example, P 2).

  Thereafter, the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a perform a communication control IC authentication sequence using the authentication key as the encryption key. The authentication key includes a temporary authentication key stored in advance from the manufacturing stage of the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a and a main authentication key generated by the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a based on predetermined data sent from the key management server. is there. The temporary authentication key is an encryption key used for communication between the SC 325b and the IC 325a until the main authentication key is generated. In the operation of the gaming machine under the authentication using the temporary authentication key, a timed operation process that is allowed only for a certain limited period (for example, 2 days) is performed, and the timed operation period has passed. A notification is sent to the host device (key management server 800 of the key management center), and the host device is in a standby state (waiting for reset) until the reset processing of the host device is started. Details of the communication control IC authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a perform the security information update sequence using the main authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key. This security information update sequence is a process in which the SC 325b sets an effective key acquired from the higher-level device (specifically, the hall server 801) for the IC 325a. The valid key is data for the IC 325a to activate communication with the gaming machine. Without the valid key, the IC 325a cannot communicate with the gaming machine. Further, the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a perform a gaming machine chip information authentication sequence. The communication control IC 325a receives the chip ID (main control chip ID) of the main control chip and the chip ID (payout control chip ID) of the payout control chip mounted on the gaming machine (for example, P stand 2), and these main controls. This is a process for verifying the authenticity of the chip ID and the payout control chip ID.

  This gaming machine chip information authentication sequence may take time because the key management server 800 first makes an inquiry about the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID. The operation process after the communication key request is executed without waiting for an inquiry from the key management server 800.

  Thereafter, the SC 325b transmits a communication key request command for requesting a communication key to the communication control IC 325a. The communication key request command is encrypted using the authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the communication key request command, the communication control IC 325a generates a communication key (session key) for communicating the business message with the gaming machine, and notifies the generated communication key to the SC 325b in response to the communication key response. Note that the response of the communication key response to be returned is encrypted using the authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key. Specifically, the communication key (session key) is generated using a random number and current time data. The current time data may be generated by the communication control IC 325a itself or received from another device. The method for generating the communication key (session key) is not limited to the random number and the current time data, and any data may be used as long as it is variable data other than the key used for the above-described mutual authentication. Further, the control may be performed such that the SC 325b, not the communication control IC 325a, generates and notifies the communication control IC 325a.

  Thereafter, the communication key (session key) is shared between the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a, and encrypted communication of the business message is performed between the two, and the business message communication between the communication control IC 325a and the gaming machine (P machine 2). Also, encrypted communication is performed using this communication key (session key).

  In this way, the communication key (session key) is updated each time the power is turned on, thereby ensuring security. Furthermore, the communication key (session key) is updated every update cycle (periodically) in addition to when the power is turned on. That is, the SC 325b performs control to update the communication key (session key) when detecting the communication key update cycle. Specifically, a key update command is transmitted from the hall server 801 (or key management server 800) to the CU 3 at each update cycle, and the SC 325b of the CU 3 that receives it transmits a communication key request to the communication control IC 325a. Similarly, control for updating the communication key (session key) is performed. Since the key update is also generated by using the random number and the data of the current time for each update cycle, the key is updated to a key different from the communication key (session key) updated when the power is turned on, and the security is further improved.

  Next, FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining the processing of the authentication sequence of the communication control IC 325a. Referring to FIG. 30, the first authentication sequence is executed between SC 325b and IC 325a. For example, the first authentication sequence authenticates the serial ID of SC 325b, that is, the SID of SC 325b stored in the EEPROM (not shown). Next, the second authentication sequence is executed between the SC 325b and the IC 325a. For example, the serial ID of IC 325a, that is, the SID of IC 325a stored in the EEPROM (not shown) is authenticated by this second authentication sequence.

  Thereafter, a version management information sequence is executed between the SC 325b and the IC 325a. The SC 325b transmits a command for requesting version management information to the IC 325a in order to check the key version. Note that the version management information request command is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  The IC 325a that has received the version management information request command transmits a response of a version management information response in order to notify the latest key version to the SC 325b. Note that the response of the version management information response is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  Thereafter, an IC authentication result sequence is executed between the SC 325b and the IC 325a. The SC 325b transmits an IC authentication result notification command to the IC 325a. By this IC authentication result notification command, the authentication results from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response are collectively notified to the IC 325a. Note that the IC authentication result notification command is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  The IC 325a that has received the IC authentication result notification command transmits an IC authentication result response response to the SC 325b. Here, the authentication results from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response are collectively notified to the SC 325b by the response of the IC authentication result response. Note that the response of the IC authentication result response is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  Thereafter, a counter information sequence is executed between the SC 325b and the IC 325a. The SC 325b transmits a counter information request command to the IC 325a. By this counter information request command, the current time information is notified to the IC 325a. Note that the counter information request command is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, a real authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  The IC 325a that has received the counter information request command transmits a response of the counter information response to the SC 325b. Here, an initial vector value of a counter used for encryption is generated by a response of the counter information response, and is notified to the SC 325b. Note that the response of the counter information response is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  Next, an example of the control content of the first authentication sequence will be described with reference to FIG. First, the authentication key random number is notified from the SC 325b to the IC 325a. This authentication key random number is data for generating an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key). The IC 325a that has received it returns an authentication key random number notification response indicating that the authentication key random number has been received to the SC 325b. Next, the SC 325b and the IC 325a generate an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key) using the mutual authentication key random number. The sequence from the notification of the authentication key random number to the generation of the authentication key (specifically, the authentication key) is executed only when the temporary authentication key is used, that is, only when the authentication key has not yet been generated. The When the authentication key is already generated and used, the sequence from the SC serial ID authentication request 1 is executed without executing the sequence from the notification of the authentication key random number to the generation of the authentication key (specifically, the authentication key). Execute.

  Next, SC serial ID authentication is performed by repeating an SC serial ID authentication request and an SC serial ID authentication response between the SC 325b and the IC 325a.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining processing of the communication control IC authentication abnormality sequence. Referring to FIG. 32, the first authentication sequence to the version management information response described in FIG. 30 are executed. The first authentication sequence to the version management information response are encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key. Both the SC 325b and the IC 325a store the serial ID of the SC and the serial ID of the communication control IC, and any one of the first authentication sequence to the version management information response uses a challenge / response method. This is a sequence for authenticating the serial ID of the SC, and any one of the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is a sequence for authenticating the serial ID of the communication control IC using the challenge / response method. The serial ID of the SC, the serial ID of the communication control IC, and the above-mentioned board serial ID are configured with different IDs.

  After these authentication sequences are completed, the IC authentication result sequence is then executed between the SC 325b and the IC 325a. An IC authentication result notification is transmitted from the SC 325b to the IC 325a. By this IC authentication result notification, the authentication results from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response are collectively notified. On the other hand, an IC authentication result response is transmitted from the IC 325a to the SC 325b. The authentication result from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is collectively notified by the IC authentication result response. When the IC authentication result notification and / or the IC authentication result response is inappropriate (NG), the following control is performed.

  When the authentication from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response has been performed using the temporary authentication key, the above-described processing from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is retried. If the number of retries is limited to two, and the IC authentication result notification and / or IC authentication result response is inappropriate even after the two retries, SC325b is ranked “communication control IC authentication error”. It notifies the device (key management server 800 of the key management center) and waits until reset processing of the host device starts (waiting for reset).

  If the IC authentication result notification and / or IC authentication result response is inappropriate even after multiple (here, twice) retries, return by reset processing (for example, operation of reset button (not shown) or power-on) To do. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reset may be performed on the condition that the SC 325b has been authenticated with the key management server 800 or the hall server 801 as the host device when waiting for reset.

  Next, the authentication key immediately after the update, that is, the authentication key generated as a result of the first authentication sequence in FIG. 31 (specifically, this authentication key) is used for authentication from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response. If the generated authentication key (specifically, this authentication key) is abnormal, an alarm indicating that the authentication key update is abnormal is notified to the key management server 800 of the key management center. This is executed using a temporary authentication key from the authentication sequence. If these authentication results are appropriate, as described above, a timed operation process that is allowed only for a certain limited period (for example, two days) is performed, and business message communication with the gaming machine is performed only during that period. Is possible. When the timed operation period has passed, the host device (key management server 800 of the key management center) is notified, and the host device is in a standby state (waiting for reset) until reset processing starts. In the timed operation, the control content (game content) or the like may be limited instead of or in addition to the time limit. For example, it is conceivable that an upper limit is set for the number of game balls, and the continuation of the game is not allowed unless it is once converted (counted) into the number of possessed balls when the upper limit is added.

  The control operations of the sequence between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 and the sequence between the SC 325 and the IC 325a described above are collectively described below.

  The IC 325a stores IC 325a identification information for identifying the IC 325a and SC 325b identification information (stores ID information and the like), and the SC 325b identifies the SC 325b identification information (board serial ID) and the IC 325a identification. Information (ID information etc.) is stored. Then, a challenge code is generated between the SC 325b and the IC 325a using the SC 325b identification information stored in the SC 325b and transmitted to the IC 325a, and the IC 325a is received using the stored SC 325b identification information. A response code is generated from the challenge code, returned to the SC 325b, and the second challenge response authentication process (first authentication sequence in FIG. 30) for determining the suitability of the received response code using the stored SC 325b identification information in the SC 325b. ) And a challenge code is generated using the IC 325a identification information stored in the IC 325a and transmitted to the SC 325b, and the SC 325b uses the stored IC 325a identification information to read from the received challenge code. A third challenge response authentication process (second authentication sequence in FIG. 30) for generating a response code and returning it to the IC 325a, and determining in the IC 325a whether or not the response code received using the stored IC 325a identification information is appropriate. Do.

  According to such operation control, the challenge code received between the SC 325b and the IC 325a using the identification information transmitted from one control means to the other control means and stored in the other control means. Since response code is generated and sent back to one control means, challenge-response authentication is performed, so even if a challenge code or response code sent or received between control means is leaked, it will be stored It is difficult to specify the identification information that is present, and fraudulent acts on the control means due to leakage of the identification information can be prevented as much as possible.

  A gaming system or gaming device (CU3, P stand 2, jet counter, POS terminal, etc.) provided with SC325b and IC325a that perform cryptographic communication with each other can be classified into a plurality of types with different authentication methods between SC325b and IC325a. Mutual authentication processing means (first authentication sequence to version management information response in FIG. 32) for performing the mutual authentication processing of FIG. 32 and authentication results of each mutual authentication alone in a plurality of types of mutual authentication processing performed by the mutual authentication processing means. General notification means for notifying the authentication partner control means of the independent authentication result in the case of inappropriateness, but summing up the abnormalities of the results of executing all of the multiple types of mutual authentication and notifying the authentication partner control means (FIG. 32: The authentication sequence from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is collectively notified). Then, the mutual authentication processing unit performs a re-authentication process in which a plurality of types of mutual authentication processes are performed again between the control units having the abnormality after the abnormality is collectively notified by the general notification unit (FIG. 32: No. 32). The authentication sequence from 1 authentication sequence to version management information response is retried at most twice).

  According to such operation control, a plurality of types of mutual authentication processes with different authentication methods are performed between the first control unit and the second control unit and between the IC 325a and the IC 325a. Even if the security of mutual authentication by one authentication method is broken, the security of mutual authentication can be maintained by mutual authentication by another different authentication method.

  In addition, for example, when the authentication result of each type of mutual authentication of each of the multiple types of mutual authentication is inappropriate, the type of mutual authentication is notified when the authentication result is notified to the control means of the authentication partner. However, it is not desirable for security because it is known that the authentication result is incorrect. In order to sum up the abnormalities of the results of executing all of the multiple types of mutual authentication and not to notify the control method of the other party of authentication, it is not possible to see which type of mutual authentication has occurred , Can improve security.

  Furthermore, since the re-authentication process is performed again between the control means in which the abnormality occurred after the general notification of the abnormality, it is possible to check again whether the mutual authentication is really abnormal, and the reliability of mutual authentication Can be improved.

  In addition, the gaming system or the gaming machine stops the subsequent processing between the inappropriate control means on the condition that the result of the re-authentication processing by the mutual authentication processing means is inappropriate (FIG. 32: Further waiting for reset).

  According to such operation control, since the subsequent processing is stopped between the inappropriate control means on the condition that the result of the re-authentication process is not reliable and the reliability is inappropriate, it is not inappropriate. Nevertheless, the inconvenience of stopping the subsequent processing can be reduced as much as possible.

  In addition, the gaming system or gaming device performs an abnormality notification for executing processing for notifying the management server of the occurrence of an abnormality on the condition that the result of the re-authentication processing by the mutual authentication processing means is inappropriate. It further includes processing means (FIG. 32: “communication control IC authentication error” is notified to the host device).

  According to such operation control, since the notification of the occurrence of an abnormality is sent to the management server on the condition that the result of the re-authentication process is not reliable and the reliability is inappropriate, it is not inappropriate. Nevertheless, the inconvenience of notifying the management server of the occurrence of an abnormality can be reduced as much as possible.

  The mutual authentication processing means in the above gaming system or gaming machine generates a challenge code in the IC 325a and transmits it to the SC 325b, and generates a response code from the received challenge code using the identification information stored in the SC 325b. The first challenge response authentication process (first authentication sequence in FIG. 30) for determining the suitability of the response code received using the stored identification information in IC 325a, and the challenge code is generated in SC 325b Then, a response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the IC 325a and sent back to the SC 325b. In the SC 325b, the response code received using the stored identification information is received. Pons second challenge response authentication process of determining the appropriateness of code is performed (second authentication sequence of FIG. 30).

  According to such operation control, in SC 325b and IC 325a, a response is received from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the other control means by transmitting the challenge code from one control means to the other control means. Even if a challenge code or response code sent and received between both gaming means is leaked because it is challenge-response type authentication that generates a code and sends it back to one control means, it will be stored It is difficult to specify the identification information that is present, and fraudulent acts on the gaming means due to leakage of the identification information can be prevented as much as possible.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following because of the abbreviation of the pachinko machine as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to the S units. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 33, in the slot machine 2S, a front door 2bS is provided to the main body frame 2aS so that the front door 2bS can be opened and closed with the left side edge as a swing center. Although not shown in FIG. 33, a CU is connected to the left side of the slot machine 2S in the same manner as the P units.

  In the slot machine 2S, the number of bets is set by using game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with winning. For this reason, when playing a game in the slot machine 2S, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the slot machine 2S is not provided with a medal slot and a medal payout slot.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 2S, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window provided on the front door 2bS. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  A touch panel display 510 is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 2bS. The display 510 is a display corresponding to the P displays 54, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) of the same type as the display 54, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510 is connected to the display control unit 350 of the CU in the same manner as the display unit 54 in FIG. 2 and is controlled on the CU side. The indicator 510 is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, but is provided at a lower panel portion (at a position below the start switch 7S shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  Further, the front door 2bS has a single BET switch 5S that is operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) The MAXBET switch 6S is operated, the start switch 7S is operated when the game is started, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are respectively operated when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. Yes.

  When playing a game in the slot machine 2S, first, as with the P machines, after securing a game point using the adjacent CU, the number of bets is set using the game point. The game points can be obtained by withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, points, or a stored medal (corresponding to P stored balls) deposited in the game hall. In order to use the game points, the single BET switch 5S or the MAXBET switch 6S may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the number of bets to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510 is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the gaming state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7S is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7S is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously change. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, When the 2R display result is stopped, a prize is generated, a game point determined according to the prize is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510 is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 2S is provided with a counting button 28S for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the card return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 2). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display unit 510 in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted and the display 510 displays a state in which the points are increased while the game points are decreased. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3 or may be transmitted to the CU 3 as a status information response via the P unit 2 or the S unit (slot machine) 2S. It may be.

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be excluded is determined by, for example, the main control unit (S) controlling the slot machine 2S when a start operation is detected. It corresponds to the main control unit 161 of the stand). This determination is made, for example, by drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base gives the player game points according to the type of winning (adds game points).

  In other words, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value by using the S units, and a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device, and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, which is displayed on the variable display device Before the result is derived, a predetermining unit that determines whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to be generated, and causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining unit A slot machine including derivation control means for performing control and giving means for giving a game value when the winning occurs is configured.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and its transmission / reception mode. FIG. 34 is obtained by replacing the terminology of FIG. 5 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. The description of is omitted.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the present embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) In this embodiment, the addition sequence number and the counting sequence number are defined in the message format as different data, but these may be shared as a request sequence number. In particular, the addition of game balls and the counting of game balls are the opposite processes, so it is unlikely that both processes will occur at the same time. From this point of view, it is possible to reduce the amount of message data by sharing both serial numbers. It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new request is generated until the request sequence number reaches a predetermined upper limit value, the sequence number is updated based on the previously updated value. However, instead of such control, when all the processes corresponding to one request are completed, the request sequence number may be initialized to a predetermined initial value. For example, in the example of FIG. 11, it is conceivable that the counting sequence number included in the last status information response indicating the completion of counting is set to a predetermined initial value instead of m + 6.

  Request sequence numbers such as addition sequence numbers and count sequence numbers, and normal sequence numbers are not counted up one by one, but are updated (additional update, subtraction) according to a predetermined rule stored in both P unit 2 and CU3. Update, update by other arithmetic expressions). In this case, the serial number is not “sequential numbers” such as 1, 2, and 3, but data that is updated based on concepts such as A, B, and C.

  (2) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the gaming system, for example, a game in which there are P reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board that controls the reels. Corresponding to the board, other configurations correspond to P game frames. However, the S units do not require the various detection switches 41a, 701, 33, the launch control board 31, and the launch motor 18 of the game frame shown in FIG.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in this embodiment, since the function of displaying the dollar box is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience. In addition, it is desirable for the dollar box display in the case of S units to have a large number of medals loaded instead of a large number of balls.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510 or 29S.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, point payout operation) from the remaining amount of a prepaid card, a saving medal, or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display 510 or the display 29S, and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. That is, if the one-sheet BET switch 5S is operated, 1 is added to the betting number setting value and 1 is subtracted from the credit. If the MAXBET switch 6S is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display 510 or the display 29S and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be a target for dollar box display.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (3) In the present embodiment, game points are added by consuming card power. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (4) In the present embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (5) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may be one using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (6) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (7) In the present embodiment, when an uncounted game point remains when a card return operation is performed, a message prompting for counting is displayed on the display of P units or the CU side. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P table or the CU side is used. It may be notified that automatic counting has started because there are still uncounted game points, or that, in addition, the card will be returned after completion of automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that there is a possibility that the player may leave the table temporarily, and the display (CU side or P stand side) You may display the message which confirms whether it is temporary leaving. Further, the display device may be constituted by a touch panel so that the player can input a response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily away from the desk, the card may be temporarily ejected while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side, the P platform side, or both. Thereafter, when a card with the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (8) During the big hit, the judgment reference value for judging that the number of game balls is full may be increased. In other words, the determination reference value for the full tank determination may be different depending on whether or not the big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls from rapidly increasing during the big hit, and making a full tank determination immediately to stop firing.

  (9) The number of game balls when a big hit occurs is memorized. During the big hit, even if the criterion value for full tank is exceeded, the increased number of game balls allowed after the big hit has occurred If it is within a value (for example, 1000 balls), it is good also as what does not determine a full tank.

  (10) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times twice or more may be employed. As a result, erroneous operation can be prevented. Further, in this case, one function may be used to exhibit another function different from the counting function. For example, when there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the operation is performed once, a function to turn on a lamp for calling a store clerk is exhibited, and within 1 second from 1 operation. When the second operation is detected, it is conceivable to perform the counting function.

  (11) “Predetermined processing” of “recording medium processing means for processing so that predetermined processing can be performed using the game point as the holding point when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected” , CU processing when using a card ejected from the CU inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine (processing to withdraw the possessed ball that can be specified by the card and convert it into a gaming ball , Or shared ball processing, or wagon service processing). Alternatively, the “predetermined process” may be a process in which a prize is exchanged by receiving a card with a prize exchange machine for exchanging prizes and consuming the points specified by the card.

  Further, the above-described “recording medium processing operation for processing so that a predetermined process can be performed as a holding point” is, for example, a card return operation. In addition, the “predetermined process” is a process of recording a score so as to be specified on a card inserted in the CU when a card return operation is detected, and returning the card. Here, “recordably specified” means that the score is directly recorded on the card, and the card ID and score are recorded on the server connected to the CU without recording the score on the card. And a method of storing IDs and points in association with each other in the server.

  (12) If a counting operation is performed while the ball is being fired, the counting operation may be invalidated if the number of game balls at that time is equal to or less than a reference value. In addition, even when the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected during the ball firing exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is set to a predetermined number If the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected is less than the reference value, the counting operation may be invalidated.

  Further, whether or not a game is in progress may be determined based on whether or not a ball launching operation has been detected, and the number of in-game balls (floating balls floating in the game area 27) becomes zero. Whether or not (not in game) or not (in game) may be determined. Further, it is conceivable to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is changing, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not the attacker is open.

  Further, “in game” when S units are applied as a gaming machine and the counting operation during the game is invalidated is, for example, a period from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to the stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected until the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped.

  (13) Referring to FIG. 11, the P platform is provided with a counting ball counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (held balls), but does not include a counter that stores the cumulative value of the counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (14) The display for prompting the counting operation in FIG. 13 may be a display of “Please count because there are game balls left” in the text, or display the count button 28 on the screen and blink. Such a display may be used. In addition, the P stand 2 that has received the card return preparation state ON may display the game balls on the game ball number display 29 in a blinking manner, or when the game ball number display 29 is configured by an image display device. Alternatively, the message described as the above embodiment may be displayed on the game ball number display 29 to prompt the counting operation.

  (15) In order to change the number of game points to be converted in one operation according to the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, when a long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more), While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in a short press (for example, continuous operation for less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the remaining number of game balls is small, for example, when it is less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all game balls are counted by operating the counting button.

  (16) Depending on the remaining number of game points, when the number of points counted by one short press operation of the counting button is different, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of game points is less than 200, all the game points are counted by one short press operation of the counting button. When the game points are 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 5000 or more and less than 10,000, 2000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10,000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (17) When counting game balls (game points) and converting points, not only counting display but also counting sound may be output from a speaker. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (18) Timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on the counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (19) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is the primary station and the gaming machine is the secondary station. The relationship between and may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (20) In this embodiment, game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side. However, game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU side. Then, it may not be stored. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (21) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54 may be performed on the display 312 in the same manner.

  (22) In CU3, the number of game balls stored is updated based on the value of the addition ball counter (addition ball count) and the value of the subtraction ball counter (subtraction ball count) transmitted from the P platform side. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801 (in this case, hall management). An error notification may be performed by a computer or hall server 801).

  (23) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (holding ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (24) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while the player is grasping the hitting operation handle. Invalidating the counting operation means detecting the counting operation but not executing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Or, if the player does not invalidate the counting operation only by touching the hitting operation handle, and if the counting operation is disabled if the hitting operation handle is turned to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output. Good.

  In these cases, when a counting operation is detected, a message “Please release handle” may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the touch panel screen, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (25) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the card return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (26) The gaming system according to the present embodiment includes a point use operation means for executing a predetermined point use process using points. Here, the predetermined score use processing includes processing for executing the wagon service, or processing for dividing and sharing the score (held ball) (processing for dividing and transferring the score to another person). It is a concept. The holding point use operation means is, for example, a touch panel. Alternatively, the point use operation means may be a remote controller that is given to a clerk of the game store to instruct the CU or the gaming machine to execute the point use processing.

  (27) The sequence control shown in FIGS. 7 to 25 is not limited to the transmission / reception sequence between control devices in a single gaming machine such as CU3, P stand 2, S stand 2S, etc. For example, CU3, P You may apply to the transmission / reception sequence between several game machines, such as the stand 2, a jet counter, and a POS terminal. 26 and 27 is applied between the CU control unit 323 inside the CU 3 and the security chip (SC) 325b, and between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325a. May be.

  For example, when processing related to a game ball addition request is applied between the CU control unit 323 and the security chip (SC) 325b, the CU control unit 323 transmits a game ball addition request message, and consent to this is transmitted. Alternatively, the SC 325b returns a rejection message via the communication control IC 325a based on the response on the P platform 2 side.

  When processing related to a game ball addition request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325a, the security chip (SC) 325b transmits a game ball addition request message via the CU control unit 323. Then, the communication control IC 325a returns an approval or rejection message for this based on the response on the P platform 2 side.

  When the processing related to the counting request is applied between the CU control unit 323 and the security chip (SC) 325b, the counting request message is sent from the SC 325b to the CU control unit via the communication control IC 325a based on the request on the P unit 2 side. The CU control unit 323 returns an approval or rejection message for the transmission.

  When the processing related to the counting request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325a, the communication control IC 325a transmits a counting request message based on the request on the P base 2 side, The security chip (SC) 325b returns a rejection message based on an instruction from the CU control unit 323.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, the identity of the player is determined based on the card ID, but instead of or in addition to that, the identity of the player is determined based on the player's fingerprint, retina and other biomass. A determination may be made.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the card ID matches the insertion time is stored as the current score by the CU. Control is made so that the score transmitted from the gaming machine is stored as the current score as a further condition that the communication has been started until a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has passed since the communication was interrupted. May be. Specifically, a timer for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) after communication between the gaming machine and CU3 is interrupted is provided in the CU control unit 323 at the start of communication between the gaming machine and CU3 (at the time of recovery). It is determined whether or not the timer is still timed (in a state where time is not up), and on the further condition that it is a result of determination that the timer is timed, the score sent from the gaming machine is the current value of the CU. It controls to memorize as a score.

  Further, instead of the insertion time, the CU may store the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the last serial number used between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 matches, as the current score. .

  (30) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win, but instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are added. It may be controlled to withdraw and add the number of game balls or game points.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is withdrawn within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (prepaid balance, holding balls, savings) and the corresponding game points are added, the value withdrawn. However, instead, for example, it may be controlled to add game points that are smaller by the amount equivalent to the consumption tax with respect to the value actually withdrawn.

  (32) In this embodiment, the key management server is installed in the key management center that is remote from the game arcade. However, the key management server may be installed in the game hall. Thereby, compared with the case where a key management server is installed outside the game hall, it is easier to speed up communication between the CU and the key management server, and the occurrence rate of communication failures can be reduced.

  (33) The CU control unit 323 receives board security information (including board authentication key and update information) from the key management server 800 via the hall server 801. However, instead of this, the board security information is transmitted from the key management server 800 to the CU control unit 323 without using the hall server 801 between the key management server 800 and the CU control unit 323. For example, it is conceivable that the key management server 800 and the CU are directly connected to each other, or a relay communication device different from the hall server 801 is provided between the key management server 800 and each CU.

  (34) In the above embodiment, the number of balls automatically counted based on the game interruption operation (simple leaving operation or meal break operation) is temporarily added to the holding ball and written to the card. By doing so, the player who interrupted the game returns, and then inserts the card into the original card unit 3 again, and converts the holding ball into a game ball by 125 balls. It shows what can be played by being converted into a ball. However, instead, the counting ball automatically counted at the time of the interruption operation is stored by the CU 3 as a custody ball different from the gaming ball and the holding ball (also storing the C-ID and the insertion time), and the holding ball is not added. Discontinue processing by ejecting the card without recording the ball. When the discharge card is reinserted, all the custody balls may be automatically converted into P game balls at once and control may be performed. Alternatively, the custody balls in this case are transmitted from the P platform to the CU based on the interruption operation, stored on the CU side or the hall server side, and automatically from the CU or the hall server when the card is inserted again. It is also possible that information on the custody ball is transmitted to the P platform side and stored as a game ball on the P platform side. Further, in this case, when the information on the custody balls is transmitted, it may be transmitted from the CU to the P units as a game ball addition command.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the interruption operation is added to the holding ball and written to the card and then discharged, the interruption flag is recorded on the card. So that you can't exchange prizes with that card. As a method for prohibiting the exchange of prizes as described above, the following method other than using the suspended flag of the card may be adopted.

  First, when an interruption operation is performed, the information (including the card ID) is transmitted from the CU to the hall server, and the card of the player suspended on the hall server side is stored as an interruption card. At the time of prize exchange, an inquiry is made to the hall server from POS or the like, and the hall server determines whether or not the card used for prize exchange is an interruption card. Alternatively, all interruption card information may be transmitted from the hall server to the POS side in advance. In addition, if the card used for the exchange of the prize is an interrupted card, the exchange of the prize using the card is prohibited.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine determines that the gaming device (CU) is given the game points as the holding points on the condition that the conversion process for all game points is completed (game points = 0). (Processing that accepts a card with a prize exchange machine and consumes the points specified by the card and enables prize exchange, and inserts a card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. A validating means for validating the recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the card return button 322)) for performing the processing of the CU when used in the same manner.

  (36) In the present embodiment, as an example of the game information, the description has been given by taking the ball number, the game ball, the remaining amount of the card, the storage ball, the number of balls information and the game table information. However, the game information includes other information related to the game on the gaming machine. For example, when a player's favorite character selected or customized by the player can be displayed on variable display means (variable display device) such as the variable display device 278 or the display device 54, information that can specify the character Is also included in the game information. Information on the screen design including the character that matches the player's preference is transmitted to the server at the end of the game in association with the player's card ID and stored, for example, when starting a new game. You may make it download from a server to CU or P stand.

  (37) In the game ball number display 29, a display is made in which the number of balls is decreased one by one in conjunction with the ball firing or counting operation. In addition, the game ball number display 29 displays such that the number of balls increases by one or a predetermined number of units according to a ball lending operation or the like. When the game ball number display 29 is constituted by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device, the number of game balls is not simply displayed digitally, but whether the change in the number of game balls is due to a ball or not is counted. Whether it is due to winning, winning a prize, due to savings, or due to a lending operation, an image according to the type is displayed along with the display update of the number of game balls You may make it do.

  In addition, when the counting operation is performed, the game ball number display 29 performs counting display in conjunction with the counting operation, but when the game ball number display 29 is configured by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device. In the same manner as the display 54, the number of game balls may be counted and the number thereof may be decreased, while an image display in which the number of holding balls is increased may be performed. In this case, as described above as a modification of the display of the display unit 54, the display of the number of game balls converted to the number of balls data over time (for example, a bar graph display), the current The number of game balls and the number of balls are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of balls is increased while decreasing the number of balls, or the display of moving a part of the number of balls to the number of balls is repeated. It is possible.

  (38) As shown in FIG. 13, in the above embodiment, the card return operation detected in the state where the game balls remain is counted by detecting the counting operation in a predetermined waiting period. It is activated after completion and shifts to card return processing.

  On the other hand, as a process in the case where the counting operation is not detected even after the standby period elapses, for example, the previous card return operation may be invalidated. In this case, since the counting operation is not detected even when the standby period elapses, the display on the CU3 or P table 2 side may display that the card return operation has been invalidated.

  Alternatively, the card return operation detected with the game balls remaining may be invalidated regardless of whether the counting operation is detected in a predetermined waiting period. In this case, the card return process may be executed again by executing the card return operation after counting all the game balls in accordance with the counting operation after the card return operation is detected. Alternatively, when the counting of all game balls is completed, or before and after that, a display for prompting a card return operation may be performed on the display on the CU 3 or P stand 2 side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if even one game ball remains when a card return operation is detected, the process shown in FIG. 13 is executed. However, the processing shown in FIG. 13 may be executed when the number of game balls remaining when the card return operation is detected is a predetermined number of two or more.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, the counting display speed of the game balls may be made faster than usual. For example, in a normal counting operation, a display in which game balls are counted one by one is displayed, while in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a display in which a plurality of game balls are counted together, or for all games It is conceivable to display such that balls are counted together.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, not all game balls are counted, but a larger number of game balls than the normal counting operation are counted. It is good. For example, normally, a maximum of 100 game balls are counted as one counting operation, but in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a larger number of 200 gaming balls are counted. You may be made to do. Even in this case, when there is a card return operation in advance, the number of counting operations for counting all game balls is reduced compared to when there is no card return operation, and counting of all game balls is completed early. Can do.

  Also, if a card return operation is detected with game balls remaining, even if no counting operation is detected, start counting all game balls, and then proceed to card return processing. Also good. In this case, when counting of all game balls is started, the fact that counting of all game balls is started may be displayed on the P stand 2 or CU3. Alternatively, a message for confirming whether or not the counting of all game balls may be started is displayed, and a predetermined operation (for example, an operation on the touch panel of P stand 2 or CU 3 or a card return operation again) is detected. It is also possible to start counting all game balls on the condition.

  In addition, the card return operation detected during the game (during ball launching) may be invalidated, but the card return operation is not invalidated, and the counting operation during the game is performed on the P platform side. The counting process based on the above may be invalidated.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, CU3 determines whether the number of game balls is 0, when card return operation is detected. However, such a determination may be made by the P base 2. In this case, for example, when a card return operation is detected, data indicating the presence of the card return operation is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2, and the number of game balls stored by the P stand 2 itself is 0. It is determined whether or not. If it is 0, the number of game balls is 0 or data allowing card return is transmitted to CU3, while if it is not 0, the number of game balls is not 0, card return standby or card return prohibition is prohibited. The indicated data is transmitted to CU3.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when operation of a count button is detected, the P stand 2 determines whether card return operation is detected before the detection of the operation. However, such determination means may be provided in the CU3. In this case, for example, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P base 2 transmits data indicating that to the CU 3. The CU 3 receiving it can be considered to determine whether or not there has been a card return operation within a predetermined period before receiving the data.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the P table 2 detects the counting operation, while the CU 3 detects the card return operation, but the CU 3 detects the counting operation, while the P table 2 detects the card returning operation. Alternatively, both the operations may be detected by the P stand 2 or the CU 3. In addition, both the counting button and the card card return button may be attached to the CU 3 or the P stand 2, and one may be the CU 3 or the P stand 2.

  (39) The presence or absence of a change in the number of holding balls or game balls is checked on the CU or P stand. If the number of holding balls or game balls does not change for a predetermined period, the fact is notified on the CU or P stand. You may do it. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). This makes it easier for the store clerk to grasp, for example, a table that has been abandoned while the remaining few balls are left unattended.

  (40) Alternatively, when a player's game ball changes even though the card is not inserted into the CU, the fact may be notified by the CU or P platform. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). Thereby, for example, after the game is finished and the card is discharged, it becomes easy for the store clerk to grasp the stand where the ball caught on the game board wins and the game ball is left as it is paid out.

  (41) In the present embodiment, the CU 3 compares and determines the previous game table information and the latest game table information from the P table 2 with the data stored on its own, and the data on the P table 2 side is not improperly flooded. Confirm that the data is correct. If an error determination is made on the CU3 side, such a situation is simply due to the exchange of CU3 (regular data to be compared is not stored in the CU3 after the exchange), and this is based on fraud. Since there is a possibility that it is not a thing, the store clerk confirms the error and cancels the error with a portable terminal device such as a remote control. However, when the CU 3 is replaced with a new one in this way, the CU 3 may not perform the above error determination at all. Alternatively, the above error determination function may not be provided in the CU 3 regardless of whether or not it has been replaced.

(42) This embodiment includes the following inventions.
(1-1) The present invention is a gaming system including a gaming machine (P 2 and S 2S) and a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine,
The gaming device is:
Update information that differs depending on whether an operation request message (a game ball addition request ON state information request) requesting a predetermined operation (game ball addition operation) by the gaming machine is transmitted or a message other than the operation request message is transmitted A message transmission means for transmitting a message including (addition serial number; original addition sequence number added when game ball addition request is ON, original addition serial number when game ball addition request is OFF) (FIGS. 9, 10, 25) See)
When a message is received after transmission of the operation request message, if the update information included in the received message matches the update information included in the operation request message and transmitted, it is determined as request acceptance, and in the case of a mismatch A message determination means for determining that the request is not approved (FIG. 25; if the additional serial number is m + 1, the request is approved; if m, it is determined that the request is rejected),
The gaming machine is
When the operation request message is received, a response message transmission means for transmitting an acceptance message when accepting the request and transmitting a rejection message when rejecting the request (see FIGS. 9, 10, and 25). Including
The response message transmission means includes:
Update information transmitted in the operation request message is transmitted as update information of the acceptance message (FIG. 25; m + 1 is transmitted if the request is accepted),
Information obtained by updating the update information included in the operation request message and transmitted with predetermined information (+1) or information before update information is transmitted as update information of the reject message (FIG. 25; request) If rejected, send m).

  According to such a configuration, by referring to the update information of the message received after the operation request message is transmitted, if the update information is the same, it can be determined whether or not the operation request message has arrived. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not the returned message is an acceptance message for the operation request message.

(1-2) The present invention is a game control device (CU3 or CU control unit 323) for enabling a game on a gaming machine (P stand 2, S stand 2S),
Update information that differs depending on whether an operation request message (a game ball addition request ON state information request) requesting a predetermined operation (game ball addition operation) by the gaming machine is transmitted or a message other than the operation request message is transmitted A message transmission means for transmitting a message including (addition serial number; original addition sequence number added when game ball addition request is ON, original addition serial number when game ball addition request is OFF) (FIGS. 9, 10, 25) See)
When a message is received after transmission of the operation request message, if the update information included in the received message matches the update information included in the operation request message and transmitted, it is determined as request acceptance, and in the case of a mismatch Telegram determination means for determining that the request is not approved (FIG. 25; request approval if the additional serial number is m + 1, and request rejection if m is added).

  According to such a configuration, by referring to the update information of the message received after the operation request message is transmitted, if the update information is the same, it can be determined whether or not the operation request message has arrived. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not the returned message is an acceptance message for the operation request message.

(1-3) The present invention is a game control device (communication control IC 325a between the P base 2, the S base 2S, or the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a) for enabling a game,
When an operation request message requesting a predetermined operation (game ball addition operation) (game ball addition request ON state information request) is received, if the request is accepted, an approval message is transmitted and the request is rejected. In the case, it includes a response message transmission means (see FIGS. 9, 10, and 25) for transmitting a rejection message,
The response message transmission means includes:
Update information transmitted in the operation request message is transmitted as update information of the acceptance message (FIG. 25; m + 1 is transmitted if the request is accepted),
Information obtained by updating the update information included in the operation request message and transmitted with predetermined information (+1) or information before update information is transmitted as update information of the reject message (FIG. 25; request) If rejected, send m).

  According to such a configuration, when the update information included in the response message for the operation request message is referred to by the other party, if the update information is the same as the update information transmitted from the other party, the operation request message arrives. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not the returned message is a consent message for the operation request message.

(1-4) The gaming system according to (1-1) above,
The gaming machine is
Transmitted information storage means for storing game information (the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, etc.) transmitted to the gaming device (an area for storing previous game table information in FIGS. 5 and 15, FIG. 15 and FIG. 17 and other recovery data (recovery information) area)
Pre-transmission information storage means (area for storing the latest game table information in FIG. 5) for storing game information before transmission to the gaming device;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting the game information stored in the pre-transmission information storage means to the gaming device (transmission of status information response as in FIG. 17);
A recovery message including update information (last last transmission addition serial number m in FIG. 17) included in the last message transmitted after recovering from the communication disabled state where communication with the gaming device cannot be performed. Recovery message transmission means for transmitting (recovery response of FIG. 15, FIG. 17, etc.),
The recovery message transmitting means transmits the game information stored in the transmitted information storage means in the recovery message (recovery data (game information) is notified by the recovery response in FIG. 15),
The gaming device is connected to the gaming machine based on a recovery message (recovery response shown in FIGS. 15, 17, etc.) transmitted from the gaming machine after recovering from an incommunicable state in which communication with the gaming machine is not possible. The consistency of information is taken (in FIG. 15, the previous gaming machine information is processed based on the received recovery response (with game information stored) to match the game information (number of game balls, etc.)) and the communication disabled state It is determined whether or not a predetermined operation based on the operation request message transmitted last before is executed in the gaming machine (in FIG. 17, the CU determines whether the ) (Additional serial number mismatch is detected)
When it is determined that the predetermined operation is not being executed in the gaming machine, the request for the predetermined operation is retransmitted (addition request is retransmitted by transmitting recovery request 2 in FIG. 17), and then the transmitted information storage means Send an initialization message to initialize the game information stored in (Send communication start request of FIG. 17),
When it is determined that the predetermined operation is being executed in the gaming machine, the initialization message (sends the communication start request in FIG. 15) is transmitted without retransmitting the request for the predetermined operation.

  According to such a configuration, based on the recovery message, not only can the consistency between the gaming machine and the game information be made, but also a predetermined based on the operation request message transmitted last before the communication is disabled. It is possible to determine whether or not the operation is being executed on the gaming machine. If the predetermined operation has not been executed in the gaming machine, the predetermined operation is executed by retransmitting the request for the predetermined operation before initializing the game information stored in the transmitted information storage means. It is possible to prompt.

(1-5) The gaming system according to (1-1) or the gaming control device according to (1-2) (1-3),
When transmitting the operation request message, the message transmission means transmits information obtained by updating the update information included in the message received immediately before with predetermined information (+1) or information before update of the update message. When transmitting as update information and transmitting a message other than the operation request message, update information included in the message received immediately before is transmitted as update information of the transmission message (see FIGS. 9, 10, and 25).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not it is an operation request message based on whether or not the update information included in the transmitted message has been updated.

(1-6) The gaming system according to (1-1) (1-4) (1-5) above,
The message transmission means and the response message transmission means transmit transmission order information (normal serial number n) that can specify the transmission order of the messages in each message separately from the update information (FIG. 10 and the like).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the arrival of a message other than the communication related to the operation request message.

(2-1) The present invention is a gaming system including a gaming machine (P 2 and S 2S) and a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Whether to send an operation request message (status information response of counting request ON) requesting a predetermined operation (addition operation (counting operation)) of the gaming device or a message other than the operation request message A message transmission means for transmitting a message including different update information (counting sequence number: one added to the original counting sequence number when the counting request is ON, and the original counting sequence number when the counting request is OFF) (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 26) )When,
When a message is received after transmission of the operation request message, if the update information included in the received message matches the update information included in the operation request message and transmitted, it is determined as request acceptance, and in the case of a mismatch A message determination means for determining that the request is not approved (FIG. 26; request approval if the counting serial number is m + 1, and request rejection if m),
The gaming device is:
When the operation request message is received, a response message transmission means for transmitting an acceptance message if the request is accepted and transmitting a rejection message if the request is rejected (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 26). Including
The response message transmission means includes:
Update information transmitted in the operation request message is transmitted as update information of the acceptance message (FIG. 26; m + 1 is transmitted if the request is accepted),
Information obtained by updating update information included in the operation request message and transmitted with predetermined information or information before update information is transmitted as update information of the rejection message (FIG. 26; request rejection) Send m).

  According to such a configuration, by referring to the update information of the message received after the operation request message is transmitted, if the update information is the same, it can be determined whether or not the operation request message has arrived. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not the returned message is an acceptance message for the operation request message.

(2-2) The present invention is a game control device (communication control IC 325a between the P stand 2 or the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a) for enabling a game,
An operation request message (a count request ON state information response) requesting a predetermined operation (addition operation (counting operation) of holding balls) by a gaming device (CU3) that is communicably connected to the gaming machine is transmitted A message transmission that transmits a message including update information that differs depending on whether a message other than the operation request message is transmitted (counting sequence number: one that is added to the original counting sequence number when the counting request is ON, or the original counting sequence number when the counting request is OFF) Means (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 26);
When a message is received after transmission of the operation request message, if the update information included in the received message matches the update information included in the operation request message and transmitted, it is determined as request acceptance, and in the case of a mismatch Telegram determination means for determining that the request is not approved (FIG. 26; request approval if the counting sequence number is m + 1, and request rejection if m is m).

  According to such a configuration, by referring to the update information of the message received after the operation request message is transmitted, if the update information is the same, it can be determined whether or not the operation request message has arrived. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not the returned message is an acceptance message for the operation request message.

(2-3) The present invention is a game control device (CU3 between CU3 and P stand 2 or SC325b between SC325b and communication control IC 325a) for enabling a game,
Action request message (counting request ON state information response) requesting a predetermined action (adding action (counting action)) by a gaming device (CU3) communicably connected to the gaming machine (P stand 2) Includes a response message transmission means (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 26) for transmitting an acceptance message when accepting the request and transmitting a rejection message when rejecting the request,
The response message transmission means includes:
Update information transmitted in the operation request message is transmitted as update information of the acceptance message (FIG. 26; m + 1 is transmitted if the request is accepted),
Information obtained by updating the update information transmitted in the operation request message with predetermined information (+1) or information before update of the update information is transmitted as update information of the reject message (FIG. 26; request) If rejected, send m).

  According to such a configuration, when the update information included in the response message for the operation request message is referred to by the other party, if the update information is the same as the update information transmitted from the other party, the operation request message arrives. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not the returned message is a consent message for the operation request message.

(2-4) In the gaming machine of (2-1) or the gaming control device of (2-2) (2-3),
When transmitting the operation request message, the message transmission means transmits information obtained by updating the update information included in the message received immediately before with predetermined information (+1) or information before update of the update message. When transmitting as update information and transmitting a message other than the operation request message, update information included in the message received immediately before is transmitted as update information of the transmission message (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 26).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not it is an operation request message based on whether or not the update information included in the transmitted message has been updated.

(2-5) The gaming system according to (2-1) (2-4) above,
The message transmission means and the response message transmission means transmit transmission order information (normal serial number n) that can specify the transmission order of the messages in each message separately from the update information (FIG. 10 and the like).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the arrival of a message other than the communication related to the operation request message.

(3-1) The present invention is necessary for a game on the gaming machine using the gaming machines (P 2 and S 2S) and the gaming value (card balance, holding ball, savings) owned by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3) for granting various gaming points (game balls),
The gaming device is:
Whether to send an operation request message requesting the game point addition operation (game ball addition operation) by the gaming machine (status information request of game ball addition request ON) or a message other than the operation request message A message transmission means for transmitting a message containing different update information (additional serial number; one added to the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is ON, or the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is OFF) (FIGS. 9 and 10) FIG. 25)
Value use confirmation means (confirm prepaid consumption in FIG. 9, confirm consumption of holding balls and storage balls in FIG. 10) for confirming the use of the game value when the operation request message is transmitted;
When a message is received after the operation request message is transmitted, message determination means for determining whether or not the request is approved based on update information included in the received message (FIG. 25; request approval if the addition serial number is m + 1) , If m, the request is rejected)
The gaming machine is
A response message transmission means (see FIGS. 9, 10, and 25) for transmitting a rejection message including different update information when accepting the request and when rejecting the request when the operation request message is received;
Update information included in the last message transmitted before recovering from the communication disabled state after recovering from the communication disabled state where communication with the gaming device is not possible (last previous transmission included in the recovery response in FIGS. 17 and 18) A recovery message transmission means (recovery response in FIGS. 17 and 18) for transmitting a recovery message including the addition serial number),
The gaming device is:
When the recovery message is received, the update information included in the recovery message (the last last transmission addition serial number included in the recovery response in FIGS. 17 and 18) and the last transmitted before the communication disabled state Based on the update information included in the operation request message (previous last transmission addition serial number stored on the CU side in FIGS. 17 and 18), the operation request message transmitted last before the communication disabled state is established. Addition execution determination means for determining whether or not the game point addition operation is executed based on the above (determining that the previous final transmission addition serial number is inconsistent between the CU and P units in FIG. FIG. 18 further includes a case in which the previous last transmission addition serial number matches between the CU and the P unit and the addition operation is not executed (determined that recovery of the number of added balls is not requested))
The message transmission means transmits a message requesting an addition operation that has not been executed to the gaming machine when the addition execution determination means determines that the addition operation has not been executed (recovery request in FIG. 17). 2).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to determine whether or not the operation request message has arrived by referring to the update information of the message received after the operation request message has been transmitted, but the returned message is operated. It can be determined whether or not the request message is a consent message. In addition, while the gaming device side can determine the use of the gaming value at an early stage, has the operation request message corresponding to the usage of the gaming value determined by the occurrence of the communication impossible state reached the gaming machine? Even if it becomes unknown, it can be determined whether or not the addition operation is performed on the gaming machine side based on the update information when recovering from the incommunicable state. Since the telegram requesting execution can be transmitted again, it is possible to prevent a situation in which processing does not match between the gaming device and the gaming machine due to the occurrence of a communication inability state.

(3-2) The present invention provides a game control for providing game points (game balls) necessary for a game on a gaming machine using game values (card balance, possession balls, storage balls) owned by the player. A device (CU3),
Whether to send an operation request message requesting the game point addition operation (game ball addition operation) by the gaming machine (status information request of game ball addition request ON) or a message other than the operation request message A message transmission means for transmitting a message containing different update information (additional serial number; one added to the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is ON, or the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is OFF) (FIGS. 9 and 10) FIG. 25)
Value use confirmation means (confirm prepaid consumption in FIG. 9, confirm consumption of holding balls and storage balls in FIG. 10) for confirming the use of the game value when the operation request message is transmitted;
When a message is received after the operation request message is transmitted, message determination means for determining whether or not the request is approved based on update information included in the received message (FIG. 25; request approval if the addition serial number is m + 1) , If m, the request is rejected)
After recovering from the incommunicable state where communication with the gaming machine is impossible, the recovery message including the update information included in the last message transmitted by the gaming machine before entering the incommunicable state (previous times in FIGS. 17 and 18) When the recovery response including the final transmission addition serial number is received from the gaming machine, the update information included in the recovery message and the operation request message transmitted last before the communication disabled state are included in the operation request message Based on the update information (previous last transmission addition serial number stored on the CU side in FIGS. 17 and 18), the addition of the game points based on the operation request message transmitted last before the communication disabled state Addition execution determination means for determining whether or not the operation has been executed (in FIG. 17, it is determined that the previous last transmission addition serial number is inconsistent between the CU and P units and the addition operation is performed (addition recovery is performed). Includes a final transmission summing serial number is Mu matching addition operation performed by CU and the P base and (not require recovery of the addition piece count) determination) and,
The message transmission means transmits a message requesting an addition operation that has not been executed to the gaming machine when the addition execution determination means determines that the addition operation has not been executed (recovery request in FIG. 17). 2).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to determine whether or not the operation request message has arrived by referring to the update information of the message received after the operation request message has been transmitted, but the returned message is operated. It can be determined whether or not the request message is a consent message. In addition, while the game control device can determine the use of the game value at an early stage, whether the operation request message corresponding to the use of the game value determined by the occurrence of the incommunicable state has reached the gaming machine Even if it becomes unknown, it can be determined whether or not the addition operation is performed on the gaming machine side based on the update information when recovering from the incommunicable state. Since the telegram requesting execution can be transmitted again, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which the processing is not consistent between the game control device and the gaming machine due to the occurrence of a communication impossible state.

(3-3) The gaming system according to (3-1) above,
The gaming machine is
Transmitted information storage means for storing game information (the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, etc.) transmitted to the gaming device (an area for storing previous game table information in FIGS. 5 and 15, FIG. 15 and FIG. 17 and other recovery data (recovery information) area)
Pre-transmission information storage means (area for storing the latest game table information in FIG. 5) for storing game information before transmission to the gaming device;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information stored in the pre-transmission information storage means to the gaming device (transmission of status information response as in FIG. 17),
The recovery message transmitting means transmits the game information stored in the transmitted information storage means in the recovery message (recovery data (game information) is notified by the recovery response in FIG. 15),
The gaming device is:
Based on the gaming information included in the recovery message, matching means for matching the gaming machine and gaming information (in FIG. 15, the previous gaming machine information is processed based on the received recovery response (with gaming information stored)). To match the game information (number of game balls, etc.)
The message transmission means transmits an initialization message for initializing game information stored in the transmitted information storage means after receiving the recovery message (in FIG. 15 and FIG. 17). Communication start request)
The initialization message transmission unit transmits the initialization message after transmitting a message requesting an addition operation that has not been executed when the addition execution determination unit determines that the addition operation has not been executed ( By transmitting the recovery request 2 in FIG. 17, the addition request is retransmitted, and then a communication start request is transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, on the gaming device side, after recovering from the incommunicable state, it is possible to match the gaming information with the gaming machine based on the recovery message, and the gaming machine side cannot communicate. It is possible to initialize the transmitted information storage means for the game after the state recovery. Further, when the addition operation requested before the communication impossible state recovery is not executed, the initial request is made after the execution request is issued. It becomes possible to promote the conversion.

(3-4) The game system according to (3-1) above or the game control device according to (3-2) above,
The message determination means determines that the request is approved if the update information included in the received message matches the update information transmitted in the operation request message, and determines that the request is not approved if the information does not match (see FIG. 25: If the added serial number is m + 1, the request is accepted, and if m, the request is rejected).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the request is accepted by simple determination of coincidence / mismatch between the update information included in the received message and the update information included in the operation request message.

(3-5) The game system according to (3-1) above or the game control device according to (3-2) above,
The message transmission means and the response message transmission means transmit transmission order information (normal serial number n) that can specify the transmission order of the messages in each message separately from the update information (FIG. 10 and the like).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the arrival of a message other than the communication related to the operation request message.

(3-6) The gaming system according to (3-3) above,
The initialization message transmitting means transmits a message (recovery response 2 (recovery result = recovery = FIG. 19) that rejects the request for the addition operation after transmitting a message (recovery request 2 in FIG. 19) requesting the addition operation that has not been executed. The initialization telegram is also transmitted when the processing NG) is received (in FIG. 19, the communication start request is transmitted even when the recovery result = recovery response 2 of the processing NG is received).

  According to such a configuration, even when a telegram rejecting the request for the addition operation is received, the game stored in the transmitted information storage means on the gaming machine side for a new game after the communication disabled state is recovered Information can be initialized.

(4-1) The present invention is necessary for a game on the gaming machine using the gaming machines (P 2 and S 2S) and the gaming value (card balance, holding balls, savings) owned by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3) for granting various gaming points (game balls),
The gaming machine is
Depends on whether an operation request message (counting information response of counting request ON) requesting the gaming point conversion operation (addition operation of holding balls) by the game device is transmitted or a message other than the operation request message is transmitted A message transmission means for transmitting a message including update information (counting sequence number: one added to the original counting sequence number when the counting request is ON, and the original counting sequence number when the counting request is OFF) (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 26) When,
When a message is received after transmission of the operation request message, message determination means for determining whether or not the request is approved based on the update information included in the received message (FIG. 26; request approval if the counting sequence number is m + 1) , If m, the request is rejected)
When the electronic message determination means determines that the request is accepted, deduction point determination means for determining the deduction of the game points associated with the conversion operation (in response to the status information request for counting response ON in FIG. Subtracted from the required number of balls)
The gaming device is:
When the operation request message is received, a response message transmission means for transmitting an acceptance message if the request is accepted and transmitting a rejection message if the request is rejected (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 26). When,
After recovering from an incommunicable state in which communication with the gaming machine is not possible, update information (last last transmission count serial number included in the recovery request in FIG. 21) included in the last transmitted message before entering the incommunicable state A recovery message transmitting means for transmitting a recovery message including (transmitting the recovery request of FIG. 21),
The gaming machine is
When the recovery message is received, the update information included in the recovery message (previous last transmission count sequence number included in the recovery request in FIG. 21) and the operation request transmitted last before the communication disabled state Based on the update information included in the message (previous last transmission count serial number stored on the P platform side in FIG. 21), the game based on the operation request message transmitted last before the communication disabled state Conversion execution determination means for determining whether or not the point conversion operation is executed (in FIG. 21, it is determined that the last transmission count sequence number is the same between the CU and P units, and the CU side determines that the ball addition operation is performed, However, the game ball subtraction is executed, as shown in Fig. 22. It is determined that the last transmission count sequence number does not match between the CU and P units, and the CU side determines that the holding ball addition operation is not executed, and the P ball side performs subtraction of the game balls Further)
The deduction point determining unit determines a deduction of the game points associated with the conversion operation when the conversion execution determining unit determines that the conversion operation of the game point is being executed (the last transmission count in FIG. 21). The serial number is the same between the CU and the P platform, and it is determined that the holding ball addition operation is performed on the CU side, and the game ball is also subtracted on the P platform side.

  According to such a configuration, even after a request for a game point conversion operation is generated, communication is disabled, and even if it is unclear whether or not the request is accepted by the gaming device side, at that time the gaming machine side Since the game point deduction corresponding to the conversion operation request has not been finalized, the game point is deducted even if the conversion operation request is not accepted, preventing the player from suffering a disadvantage. it can. In addition, when recovering from the communication disabled state, it is possible to determine whether or not the conversion operation is executed on the gaming device side based on the update information, and if the conversion operation has been executed, the request for the previous conversion operation is performed at that stage Since the deduction of the game points associated with is determined, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game points are not deducted on the gaming machine side despite the conversion operation being performed on the gaming device side.

(4-2) The present invention provides a gaming device (CU3) for providing game points (game balls) necessary for a game using game values (card balance, holding balls, saving balls) owned by the player. Game control devices (P 2 and S 2S) that can be connected to
Depends on whether an operation request message (counting information response of counting request ON) requesting the gaming point conversion operation (addition operation of holding balls) by the game device is transmitted or a message other than the operation request message is transmitted A message transmission means for transmitting a message including update information (counting sequence number: one added to the original counting sequence number when the counting request is ON, and the original counting sequence number when the counting request is OFF) (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 26) When,
When a message is received after transmission of the operation request message, message determination means for determining whether or not the request is approved based on the update information included in the received message (FIG. 26; request approval if the counting sequence number is m + 1) , If m, the request is rejected)
When the electronic message determination means determines that the request is accepted, deduction point determination means for determining the deduction of the game points associated with the conversion operation (in response to the status information request for counting response ON in FIG. Subtract from the required number of balls),
After recovering from the incommunicable state where communication with the gaming device is impossible, the update information included in the last message transmitted by the gaming device before entering the incommunicable state (the previous information included in the recovery request in FIG. 21) When the recovery message (recovery request in FIG. 21) including the final transmission count sequence number is received from the gaming device, the update information included in the recovery message (the last final transmission count sequence number included in the recovery request in FIG. 21). ) And the update information included in the operation request message that was last transmitted before the communication disabled state (previous last transmission count serial number stored on the P platform side in FIG. 21) Conversion execution determining means for determining whether or not the game point conversion operation is executed based on the operation request message transmitted last before the disabled state is entered (in FIG. 21, the last final transmission count sequence number is CU). It is determined that there is a match with the stand, and the CU side determines that the ball add operation has been executed, and the game ball is also subtracted on the P stand side, as shown in FIG. It is determined that the holding ball addition operation is not executed on the side, and the game balls are not subtracted on the P platform side.
The deduction point determining unit determines a deduction of the game points associated with the conversion operation when the conversion execution determining unit determines that the conversion operation of the game point is being executed (the last transmission count in FIG. 21). The serial number is the same between the CU and the P platform, and it is determined that the holding ball addition operation is performed on the CU side, and the game ball is also subtracted on the P platform side.

  According to such a configuration, even after a request for a game point conversion operation is generated, communication is disabled, and even if it is unclear whether or not the request is approved on the gaming device side, at that time, the game control device Since the game point deduction corresponding to the conversion operation request is not fixed on the side, the game point is deducted even though the conversion operation request is not accepted, and the player suffers a disadvantage Can be prevented. In addition, when recovering from the communication disabled state, it is possible to determine whether or not the conversion operation is executed on the gaming device side based on the update information, and if the conversion operation has been executed, the request for the previous conversion operation is performed at that stage. Since the deduction of the game points associated with is determined, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game points are not deducted on the game control device side even though the conversion operation is executed on the game device side.

(4-3) The game system according to (4-1) above or the game control device according to (4-2) above,
The message determination means determines that the request is approved if the update information included in the received message matches the update information transmitted in the operation request message, and determines that the request is not approved if the information does not match (see FIG. 26: If the counting sequence number is m + 1, the request is accepted, and if m, the request is rejected).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the request is accepted by simple determination of coincidence / mismatch between the update information included in the received message and the update information included in the operation request message.

(4-4) The game system according to (4-1) above or the game control device according to (4-2) above,
The message transmission means and the response message transmission means transmit transmission order information (normal serial number n) that can specify the transmission order of the messages in each message separately from the update information (FIG. 10 and the like).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the arrival of a message other than the communication related to the operation request message.

(4-5) The gaming system according to (4-1) above,
The gaming machine is
Transmitted information storage means for storing game information (the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, etc.) transmitted to the gaming device (an area for storing previous game table information in FIGS. 5 and 15, FIG. 15 and FIG. 17 and other recovery data (recovery information) area)
Pre-transmission information storage means (area for storing the latest game table information in FIG. 5) for storing game information before transmission to the gaming device;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting the game information stored in the pre-transmission information storage means to the gaming device (transmission of status information response as in FIG. 17);
Based on the recovery message (recovery request), consistency determining means (recovery in FIG. 14) determines whether or not the gaming information stored in the gaming device needs to be matched with the storage of the transmitted information storage means. Based on the request, it is determined that the last transmission serial number match between the P units and the CU, and it is determined that there is no need for matching, and a recovery response without game information storage is transmitted. And the CU determines that the last transmission serial number did not match, determines that matching is necessary, and transmits a recovery response with game information storage).
The message transmission means is a message (recovery for matching the game information stored in the gaming device with the memory of the transmitted information storage means when the match determination means determines that the match is necessary. Response) is transmitted to the gaming device (in FIG. 15, a recovery response with game information storage is transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the game information stored on the gaming device side consistent information after recovering from the communication disabled state.

(5-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and is connected to the gaming machine so as to be able to communicate with the valuable value ( A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using a balance, stored balls, number of gaming balls, cash, etc.,
The gaming device is:
Player specifying information reading means (card reader / writer) for reading player specifying information (C-ID or the like) for specifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means (the CU control unit 323 stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer);
When starting a game, player identification information transmission control means for performing control for transmitting the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (card ID is notified by the card insertion notification in FIG. 8). Notification)
The gaming machine is
Storage means for storing player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means (FIG. 8; card ID backup)
Transmission control means (FIG. 13; P table 2 is backed up by a card return response) that controls to send the player specifying information stored in the storage means to the gaming device when the game is finished. A C-ID) and game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter in FIG. 5);
Conversion request transmitting means for transmitting a conversion request for converting the gaming point to the holding point to the gaming device based on an operation (counting) for converting the gaming point to a predetermined holding point (FIG. 9; P table 2 includes a count request = ON state information request is transmitted)
The gaming device is:
Based on the conversion request transmitted from the conversion request transmitting means, a conversion process for converting the game points into the holding points is executed (FIG. 11: the number of counting balls is added to the number of holding balls) and the conversion is performed. A conversion processing unit that returns a conversion approval indicating that the request has been accepted to the gaming machine (FIG. 11; transmits a count response = ON state information request);
Identical determination for determining whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information transmitted by the control of the transmission control means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means Means (FIG. 13; determination of coincidence between the C-ID stored from the time of card insertion on the CU3 side and the C-ID notified by the card return response).

  According to such a configuration, the game points are converted into points based on the conversion operation, and the same game is determined by the player specification information transmitted from the gaming machine and the player specification information stored at the start of the game. By determining whether or not the player is specified, it is possible to determine the identity between the information specifying the player at the start of the game and the information specifying the player at the end of the game. Further, it is possible to end the game based on the determination result, and it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the game is ended by a player different from the player at the start of the game.

(5-2) The present invention includes a connection unit for connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and is valuable to the player. A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables games on the gaming machine using (balance, stored balls, number of gaming balls, cash, etc.),
Player specifying information reading means (card reader / writer) for reading player specifying information (C-ID or the like) for specifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means (the CU control unit 323 stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer);
When starting a game, player identification information transmission control means for performing control for transmitting the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (card ID is notified by the card insertion notification in FIG. 8). Notification)
Stored in the player specifying information storage means and the player specifying information transmitted from the gaming machine storing the player specifying information transmitted under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means when the game is ended. The same determination means for determining whether or not the same player is specified based on the player specifying information (FIG. 13; C-ID stored from the time of card insertion on the CU3 side, and card return response) Match determination with the C-ID notified in the above),
Based on a conversion request from the gaming machine based on an operation (counting operation) for converting the game points into predetermined points, a conversion process for converting the game points into the points is executed (FIG. 11; adding the number of counting balls to the number of holding balls) and returning a conversion approval indicating that the conversion request has been accepted to the gaming machine (FIG. 11; sending a count response = ON state information request); including.

  According to such a configuration, the game points are converted into points based on the conversion operation, and the same game is determined by the player specification information transmitted from the gaming machine and the player specification information stored at the start of the game. By determining whether or not the player is specified, it is possible to determine the identity between the information specifying the player at the start of the game and the information specifying the player at the end of the game. Further, it is possible to end the game based on the determination result, and it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the game is ended by a player different from the player at the start of the game.

(5-3) In the gaming system (5-1) or the gaming device (5-2),
The gaming device is:
A game hall specifying information storage means (CU3 stores a store code in which the game apparatus is installed) that stores game hall specifying information capable of specifying the game hall in which the game apparatus is installed;
Control device identification information storage means (CU3 stores SC substrate ID) for storing control device identification information (SC substrate ID) capable of identifying the control device (security chip 325b) provided in the gaming device;
A recording medium receiving means (card insertion / ejecting port 309) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a gaming value owned by the player;
When the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means, the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means and the control device specifying information stored in the control apparatus specifying information storage means Further includes transmission means for transmitting to the gaming machine (FIG. 8; transmitting a store code and an SC board ID by a card insertion notification when a card is inserted).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the game hall specifying information and the control device specifying information are the same.

(5-4) In the gaming system (1) or the gaming device (5-2),
The gaming device is:
Including a recording medium receiving means (card insertion / ejecting port 309) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying the player's gaming value;
The recording medium accepting means returns the accepted recording medium only when all the game points are converted into the possession points based on the conversion request transmitted from the conversion request transmitting means (FIG. 13). If game points remain during the card return operation, a count button operation is prompted, and card return processing is executed on condition that the game ball has become 0 by the count operation).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the recording medium from being returned with game points remaining in the gaming machine.

(6-1) The present invention is a gaming system comprising a gaming machine (P 2 and S 2S) and a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Information transmitting means for transmitting game specifying information (game table information (the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls)) for specifying game information that changes as a game is played (FIG. 14). To FIG. 16, input / output interface of the payout control unit 171),
The game specification information before transmission that is the game specification information before transmission to the gaming device (the latest game table information (game table information being counted)) is stored and the game specification information transmitted to the game device is transmitted. Game specific information storage means (FIG. 5: RAM of the payout control unit 171) for storing already-played game specific information (previous game table information),
The gaming device is:
Information storage means for storing the game information (FIG. 5: RAM of the CU control unit 323);
Information update means (FIG. 5: CPU of the CU control unit 323) for updating information stored in the information storage means based on the game specifying information transmitted from the information transmission means,
The information transmitting means stores the pre-transmission game stored in the game specifying information storage means at the time of communication recovery after recovery from an incommunicable state where the gaming machine and the gaming device cannot communicate with each other. Including game specific information distinction transmitting means (see FIG. 15 and FIG. 16) for transmitting the specific information and the transmitted game specific information in a manner that the gaming device can distinguish,
The gaming device is:
Based on the pre-transmission game identification information, the transmitted game identification information, and the information stored in the information storage means transmitted by the game identification information distinction transmission means, the pre-transmission game identification information and the transmitted Suitability determining means (S301, S303, S311, S312, S323) for determining whether or not the game specifying information is appropriate information;
On the condition that it is determined to be appropriate by the suitability determining means, matching means (in S303) that matches the gaming machine and game information based on the pre-transmission game specifying information and the transmitted game specifying information. It further includes a RAM of the CU control unit 323 that stores the number of game balls received at the time of NO as a new number of game balls, S313).

  According to the above configuration, the pre-transmission game identification information sent from the gaming machine at the time of communication recovery, the transmitted game identification information, and the information stored in the gaming device side are compared, and the pre-transmission gaming machine identification information, It is determined whether or not the transmitted game identification information is appropriate information, and in order to ensure consistency between the gaming machine and the game information on the condition that it is determined to be appropriate. In addition, it is possible to prevent improper restoration processing of game information on the gaming device side based on the pre-transmission game specifying information and the transmitted game specifying information as much as possible.

  In addition, the game identification information sent from the gaming machine side at the time of communication restoration is the game identification information before transmission which is the game identification information before being transmitted to the gaming device and the game identification information transmitted to the gaming device. Since the game specific information is transmitted separately from the game specific information, the suitability of each game specific information can be individually determined as compared to the case where the game specific information is transmitted collectively together. Appropriate judgment results can be obtained by fine judgment.

(6-2) Another aspect of the present invention is a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on gaming machines (P 2 and S 2S),
Information storage means (FIG. 5: RAM of the CU control unit 323) for storing game information that changes when a game is played in the gaming machine;
Information receiving means (FIGS. 14 to 16, communication control IC 325a) for receiving game specifying information for specifying the game information from the gaming machine;
Information updating means (FIG. 5: CPU of the CU control unit 323) for updating information stored in the information storage means based on the game specifying information received by the information receiving means;
The information receiving means includes the pre-transmission game specifying information transmitted from the gaming machine as the game specifying information at the time of communication recovery after recovery from an incommunicable state where communication with the gaming machine is not possible, and the game machine Including game specific information distinction receiving means (see FIGS. 15 and 16) for receiving in a manner capable of distinguishing the transmitted game specific information which is the game specific information one time before the game specific information before transmission;
The gaming device is:
Based on the pre-transmission game specific information received by the game specific information distinction receiving means, the transmitted game specific information, and the information stored in the information storage means, the pre-transmission game specific information and the transmitted game. Suitability determination means (S301, S303, S311, S312, S323) for determining whether or not the specific information is appropriate information;
On the condition that it is determined to be appropriate by the suitability determining means, matching means (in S303) that matches the gaming machine and game information based on the pre-transmission game specifying information and the transmitted game specifying information. It further includes a RAM of the CU control unit 323 that stores the number of game balls received at the time of NO as a new number of game balls, S313).

  According to the above configuration, the pre-transmission game identification information sent from the gaming machine at the time of communication recovery, the transmitted game identification information, and the information stored in the gaming device side are compared, and the pre-transmission gaming machine identification information, It is determined whether or not the transmitted game identification information is appropriate information, and in order to ensure consistency between the gaming machine and the game information on the condition that it is determined to be appropriate. In addition, it is possible to prevent improper restoration processing of game information on the gaming device side based on the pre-transmission game specifying information and the transmitted game specifying information as much as possible.

  In addition, the game identification information sent from the gaming machine side at the time of communication restoration is the game identification information before transmission which is the game identification information before being transmitted to the gaming device and the game identification information transmitted to the gaming device. Since the game specific information is transmitted separately from the game specific information, the suitability of each game specific information can be individually determined as compared to the case where the game specific information is transmitted collectively together. Appropriate judgment results can be obtained by fine judgment.

(6-3) Still another aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine (P unit 2, S unit 2S) capable of communicating with a gaming device that enables gaming on a gaming machine,
Information transmitting means (FIGS. 14 to 16, input / output interface of payout control unit 171) for transmitting game specifying information for specifying game information that changes as a result of a game to be played,
The game specification information before transmission that is the game specification information before transmission to the gaming device (the latest game table information (game table information being counted)) is stored and the game specification information transmitted to the game device is transmitted. Game specific information storage means (FIG. 5: RAM of the payout control unit 171) for storing already-played game specific information (previous game table information),
The information transmission means includes the game specification information before transmission stored in the game specification information storage means and the game specification information stored in the game specification information storage means at the time of communication recovery after recovery from an incommunicable state in which communication with the gaming device is impossible. It includes a game specific information distinguishing / transmitting means (see FIGS. 15 and 16) for transmitting the transmitted game specific information in such a manner that the gaming device can distinguish it.

  According to the above configuration, the gaming device compares the pre-transmission game identification information sent from the gaming machine at the time of communication recovery, the transmitted game identification information, and the information stored on the gaming device side before the transmission. In order to determine whether or not the gaming machine identification information and the transmitted gaming identification information are appropriate information, and to ensure consistency between the gaming machine and the gaming information on the condition that it is determined to be appropriate Thus, it is possible to prevent improper restoration processing of game information on the gaming device side based on the pre-transmission game specifying information determined to be inappropriate or the transmitted game specifying information as much as possible.

  In addition, the gaming device is configured so that the game identification information sent from the gaming machine side at the time of communication recovery is the game identification information before transmission to the gaming device and the game identification information transmitted to the gaming device. Since the information is transmitted separately from the transmitted game specific information that is information, the suitability of each game specific information is individually judged as compared to the case where the game specific information is transmitted together. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an appropriate determination result based on detailed determination of appropriateness.

(6-4) In the gaming system (1) or the gaming device (6-2),
The gaming device is:
A game hall specifying information storage means (RAM of the payout control unit 171) for storing game hall specifying information (FIG. 8: store code) capable of specifying the game hall in which the game apparatus is installed;
Control device specifying information storage means (RAM of the payout control unit 171) for storing control device specifying information (FIG. 8: SC board ID) capable of specifying the control device provided in the gaming device;
A recording medium receiving means (card reader / writer) for receiving a recording medium (card) capable of specifying a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, holding balls, savings);
When the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means, the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means and the control device specifying information stored in the control apparatus specifying information storage means It further includes transmission means (FIG. 8: communication control IC 325a) for transmitting to the gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the game hall identification information and the control device identification information transmitted from the gaming device at the time of receiving the recording medium before the communication recovery, and the game hall identification transmitted at the time of the recording medium reception after the communication recovery It is possible for the gaming machine side to compare the information and the control device specifying information to determine whether or not they match.

(6-5) In the gaming system (6-1) (6-4) or the gaming machine (6-3) above,
The gaming machine is
Order information (serial number (normal serial number)) that can specify to what repetition stage the game specifying information repeatedly transmitted by the information transmitting means has been received by the gaming apparatus is received from the gaming apparatus when the communication is restored. Order information receiving means (input / output interface of the payout control unit 171);
Based on the order information received by the order information receiving means, game specifying information reception determining means (FIGS. 14 to 16) for determining whether or not the game specifying information has been received by the gaming device until the last repetition stage. : The determination is made by comparing the last transmission serial numbers of the CU side and the P platform side)
The game specific information distinguishing and transmitting means, when the game specific information reception determining means determines that the game specific information has not been received until the last repetition stage, the pre-transmission game specific information and the transmitted game specific information Information is transmitted in such a manner that the gaming device can distinguish the information (FIG. 15: the latest game table information is transmitted in the first status information response after the communication start response after the previous game table information is included in the recovery response). .

  According to the above configuration, when it is determined that the game specifying information is not received by the gaming device until the last repetition stage, the gaming device can distinguish between the pre-transmission game specifying information and the transmitted game specifying information. Since it is transmitted in a mode, it is possible for the gaming device side to maintain consistency of game information including game identification information that has not been received. In addition, when it is determined that the game specifying information has been received up to the last repetition stage, the transmitted game specifying information is not transmitted to the gaming device unnecessarily, and the burden associated with information transmission can be reduced accordingly.

(6-6) In the gaming system of (6-1), (6-4) and (6-5) or the gaming device of (6-2) and (6-4),
The gaming device is:
Game information receiving means for receiving the current game information from the gaming machine (FIG. 5, FIG. 14: receiving a status information response of the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 23),
Based on the game specifying information received by the information receiving means, game information suitability judging means for judging suitability of the current game information received by the game information receiving means (FIG. 5: game balls stored in CU3) And the number of game balls transmitted from the P unit 2 are compared to determine a match).
The game information suitability determining means includes
Game information calculating means for calculating the current game information based on the initial value and the game specifying information based on the game information received by the game information receiving means when the communication is restored (FIG. 27B) (The current number of game balls is calculated by adding the number of additional balls sent from the P stand 2 shown in FIG. 5 and subtracting the number of subtracted balls from the initial number of game balls stored in S313) When,
The suitability of the current game information received by the game information receiving means is determined by comparing the game information calculated by the game information calculating means with the current game information received by the game information receiving means. (FIG. 5: The CU 3 compares the stored number of game balls with the number of game balls transmitted from the P unit 2 to determine coincidence).

  According to the above configuration, the current game information received from the gaming machine at the time of communication restoration is used as the initial value by the gaming device, and the current game information is calculated based on the initial value and the game specifying information. The game information becomes new game information in which the error with the game information on the gaming machine side is eliminated, and the suitability judgment is made by comparing the new game information with the current game information transmitted from the gaming machine side. It becomes possible to carry out accurately.

(6-7) The game system of (6-1), (6-4), (6-5) and (6-6) or the game of (6-2), (6-4) and (6-6) In the device
The suitability determining means includes
The transmitted game identification information received by the game identification information distinction receiving means is compared with the information stored in the information storage means to determine whether or not the transmitted game identification information is appropriate information. First determination means (S301, S303, S323);
Information stored in the information storage means and updated based on the transmitted game specific information determined to be appropriate by the first determination means and transmitted by the game specific information distinction transmission means 2nd determination means (S311, S312) which compares with the said game pre-transmission specific information and determines whether this pre-transmission game specific information is appropriate information.

  According to the above configuration, the suitability determination of the two game specifying information is performed by determining the suitability of the pre-transmission game specifying information by the first determining means and determining the suitability of the transmitted game specifying information by the second determining means. Can be done steadily.

(7-1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) to which game points are added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize, and a gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls) owned by the player, or A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points using the number of stored balls) and is communicably connected to the gaming machine (connector wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220). ,
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for game machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter, addition number) to identify the amount of change (addition balls, subtraction balls) according to game usage and winnings Counter, subtraction number counter)
A first game point storage means (game ball counter) for storing game points;
Game point update means (payout control unit 171) for updating the game points stored in the first game point storage means in accordance with the amount of change;
Control is performed to transmit update information (number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) that can specify the amount of change and game points (number of game balls) stored in the first game point storage means to the gaming device. Information transmission control means (the payout control unit 171 transmits a status information response to the CU3);
Player identification information storage means for storing player identification information (C-ID) that can identify a player playing a game on the gaming machine (the payout control unit 171 is a C-ID of a card inserted in CU3) Remember)
Player identification information transmission control means (payout control unit) for performing control to transmit the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means to the gaming apparatus at the start of communication with the gaming apparatus. 171 includes the recovery response including “last inserted card ID” and transmitted to CU3 (FIG. 16, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, etc.)),
Conversion request transmission means for transmitting a conversion request for converting game points to points based on an operation (counting operation) for converting game points into points (counting request = ON state information) Sending a response (FIG. 11 etc.)),
The gaming device is:
A point storage means for storing points (an area for storing the number of cards on the CU side in FIG. 5);
Second game point storage means for storing game points (an area for storing the number of game balls on the CU side in FIG. 5);
Information receiving means for receiving the update information (in FIG. 14 etc., the CU 3 receives the status information response from the P unit 2);
The game point update means for updating the game points stored in the second game point storage means based on the update information (in FIG. 5, CU3 indicates the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls transmitted from the P unit 2). Update the number of game balls etc. based on)
Based on the conversion request transmitted from the conversion request transmitting means, a conversion process (adding the number of balls) for converting game points into points is executed, and a conversion approval indicating that the conversion request has been approved ( Conversion processing means (see FIG. 11) for returning a counting response = ON state information request) to the gaming machine;
Player identification information reading means (a card reader / writer of CU3) for reading the player identification information;
The player identification information read by the player identification information reading means and the player identification information transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means when communication is started with the connection to the gaming machine Identical determination means for determining whether or not the same player is specified by (FIG. 16; CU3 is a card ID (recovery card ID) transmitted from the P unit 2 by a recovery response, and an inserted card ID, )
When it is determined by the same determination means that the same player is specified, the state transition means for shifting to a gameable state (FIG. 16; waiting for a remote control operation when matching is determined, and if there is a remote control operation, Resumable).

  According to such a configuration, the player identification information and the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means when communication is started again after the communication between the gaming machine and the gaming device is once interrupted. When it is determined that the same player is specified by the player specifying information transmitted by the control of the transmission control means, in order to shift to a game-ready state, a game is played before recovery of communication disconnection. This prevents inconvenience that the game is resumed by a player different from the player who has been playing.

(7-2) The present invention includes a communication unit that communicates with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) to which a gaming point is added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize, and has a gaming value (prepaid balance) owned by the player A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points using the number of possessed balls or the number of accumulated balls)
A point storage means for storing points (an area for storing the number of cards on the CU side in FIG. 5);
Game point storage means for storing game points (an area for storing the number of game balls on the CU side in FIG. 5);
A player specifying information reading means (a card reader / writer of CU3) for reading player specifying information for specifying a player who plays a game with the gaming machine;
The communication unit includes update information (the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls) that can specify the amount of change in game points according to use in games and the occurrence of winnings, and the use according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings. A conversion request from the gaming machine (FIG. 11; counting) by the operation of the gaming points (the number of game balls) updated on the gaming machine side and the conversion operating means (counting button 28) for converting the gaming points into points. Request = ON state information response) and player identification information (C-ID) stored in the gaming machine are received from the gaming machine,
The gaming device further includes:
The game point update means for updating the game points stored in the game point storage means based on the update information received by the communication unit (in FIG. 5, CU3 is the number of additional balls transmitted from the P unit 2 , Update the number of game balls etc. based on the number of balls subtracted),
Based on the conversion request received by the communication unit, a conversion process (adding the number of balls) for converting game points into points is executed, and conversion approval (counting response) indicating that the conversion request has been accepted Conversion processing means (see FIG. 11) for returning a conversion processing means (refer to FIG. 11) to return to the gaming machine;
When communication is started after being connected to the gaming machine, the same player is specified by the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information received by the communication unit. The same determination means for determining whether or not the card is inserted (FIG. 16; the CU3 determines whether the card ID (recovery card ID) transmitted from the P base 2 by the recovery response matches the inserted card ID);
When it is determined by the same determination means that the same player is specified, the state transition means for shifting to a gameable state (FIG. 16; waiting for a remote control operation when matching is determined, and if there is a remote control operation, Resumable).

  According to such a configuration, the player identification information and the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means when communication is started again after the communication between the gaming machine and the gaming device is once interrupted. When it is determined that the same player is specified by the player specifying information transmitted by the control of the transmission control means, in order to shift to a game-ready state, a game is played before recovery of communication disconnection. This prevents inconvenience that the game is resumed by a player different from the player who has been playing.

(7-3) In the gaming system (7-1) or the gaming device (7-2),
The gaming device is:
Error processing means (error processing in FIG. 16 (P game 2 data invalidity, error notification, etc.)) that executes predetermined error processing when it is determined by the same determination means that they are not the same is included.

  According to such a configuration, an error process is executed when the identity of the player is not ensured, so that the game is resumed by a player who is different from the player who has played the game before the recovery from the communication interruption. It is possible to prevent inconvenience.

(7-4) In the gaming system (7-1) or the gaming device (7-2) above,
The gaming device is:
When the communication is started by connecting to the gaming machine, the player specifying information stored in the gaming machine together with the update information and game points transmitted by the control of the information transmission control means (FIG. 16; the card ID is received together with the game information including the game ball in the recovery response).

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information can be received at the start of communication, so that the determination by the same determination means can be performed at an early timing.

(8-1) The present invention is necessary for a game in the above-mentioned gaming machine using the gaming machines (P 2 and S 2S) and the player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, holding balls, storage balls). A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3) for granting various gaming points,
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means (RAM of the payout control unit 171) for storing the game points;
Conversion request transmitting means (FIG. 11) for transmitting a conversion request for converting the gaming point to the holding point based on the operation of the conversion operating means for converting the gaming point into a predetermined holding point. : Sequential number = n + 1, Number of game balls = 800, Counting sequence number = m + 1, Counting ball number = 100, Count request = Send status information response including ON to CU3)
The gaming device is:
Based on the conversion request transmitted from the conversion request transmitting means, executes a conversion process for converting the gaming points into the possession points, and returns a conversion approval indicating that the conversion request has been accepted to the gaming machine. Conversion processing means (FIG. 11: Add the number of counting balls to the number of holding balls, and send a status information request including serial number = n + 1, card return ready state = OFF, counting serial number = m + 1, counting response = ON to P unit 2 And)
The gaming machine is
In the course of a series of conversion operations from the transmission of the conversion request to the reception of the conversion consent, a communication disabled state in which communication with the gaming device cannot be performed occurs, and at the time of communication recovery after recovery from the communication disabled state, the conversion request is Reception specifying information (previous last transmission count serial number) that can specify whether or not the game device has received is received from the gaming device, and the conversion request is received by the gaming device based on the reception specifying information Determining means (FIGS. 21 to 23: determining by comparing the last final transmission count sequence number on the P platform side with the previous last transmission count sequence number sent from the CU);
Subtraction means for subtracting the game points stored in the game point storage means on condition that the determination means has determined that the conversion request has been received by the gaming device (FIG. 21: last time on the P platform side) The number of game balls is subtracted on condition that the transmission count sequence number matches the previous last transmission count sequence number sent from the CU.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to specify whether or not a conversion request has been received by the gaming device at the time of communication recovery after a communication disabled state occurs in the middle of a series of conversion operations and the communication is recovered from the communication disabled state. The gaming machine side receives the reception specific information from the gaming device and determines whether or not the conversion request is received by the gaming device. On the condition that the conversion request is received by the gaming device, the gaming machine side In order to subtract the game points stored in the game machine, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of erroneously subtracting the game points on the gaming machine side even though the conversion request is not received by the gaming device.

(8-2) Another aspect of the present invention is a gaming device (CU3) for providing game points necessary for a game using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, holding ball, savings ball). Game machines (P 2 and S 2S) connected to be communicable with each other,
Game point storage means (RAM of the payout control unit 171) for storing the game points;
Conversion request transmitting means (FIG. 11) for transmitting a conversion request for converting the gaming point to the holding point based on the operation of the conversion operating means for converting the gaming point into a predetermined holding point. : Sequential number = n + 1, Number of game balls = 800, Counting serial number = m + 1, Counting ball number = 100, Count request = Send status information request including ON to CU3),
Conversion approval receiving means for receiving a conversion approval indicating that the conversion request has been approved from the gaming device that executes conversion processing for converting the gaming points into the possession points based on the conversion request (FIG. 11: serial number) = N + 1, card return ready state = OFF, counting sequence number = m + 1, counting response = receives status information request including ON)
In the course of a series of conversion operations from the transmission of the conversion request to the reception of the conversion consent, a communication disabled state in which communication with the gaming device cannot be performed occurs, and at the time of communication recovery after recovery from the communication disabled state, the conversion request is Reception specifying information (previous last transmission count serial number) that can specify whether or not the game device has received is received from the gaming device, and the conversion request is received by the gaming device based on the reception specifying information Determining means (FIGS. 21 to 23: determining by comparing the last final transmission count sequence number on the P platform side with the previous last transmission count sequence number sent from the CU);
Subtraction means for subtracting the game points stored in the game point storage means on condition that the determination means has determined that the conversion request has been received by the gaming device (FIG. 21: last time on the P platform side) The number of game balls is subtracted on condition that the transmission count sequence number and the previous last transmission count sequence number sent from the CU match.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to specify whether or not a conversion request has been received by the gaming device at the time of communication recovery after a communication disabled state occurs in the middle of a series of conversion operations and the communication is recovered from the communication disabled state. The gaming machine side receives the reception specific information from the gaming device and determines whether or not the conversion request is received by the gaming device. On the condition that the conversion request is received by the gaming device, the gaming machine side In order to subtract the game points stored in the game machine, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of erroneously subtracting the game points on the gaming machine side even though the conversion request is not received by the gaming device.

(8-3) In the gaming system of (8-1) or the gaming machine of (8-2),
The gaming machine receives the sequence information (previous last transmission count sequence number) that can specify to what repetition stage the information transmitted repeatedly to the gaming device during the series of conversion operations has been received by the gaming device. Order information receiving means (FIGS. 21 to 23: receiving a recovery request including serial number = 1 and the last transmission count serial number of the last time) received from the gaming device as specific information;
The determination means determines whether or not the conversion request has been received by the gaming device based on the order information (a last transmission count sequence number on the p-unit side and a last transmission count sequence number sent from the CU3) Is determined by the match determination).

  According to the above configuration, the conversion request is received by the gaming device based on the order information that can specify to what repetition stage the information transmitted to the gaming device repeatedly during a series of conversion operations has been received by the gaming device. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not it has been done.

(8-4) In the gaming system (8-1) or (8-3) or the gaming machine (8-2) or (8-3) above,
The conversion request transmission means includes:
When the recording medium process is performed so that a predetermined process can be performed as the score, the game point storage means stores the processing compared to when the recording medium process is not performed. A conversion request is sent to make more of the game points (all game balls, game points owned by the player) of the game points to be subject to the conversion process.

  According to the above configuration, when the recording medium processing is performed, many game points can be converted into points, and the conversion time of game points can be shortened.

(8-5) In the gaming system of (8-1), (8-3) and (8-4) or the gaming machine of (8-2), (8-3) and (8-4),
The conversion request transmission means includes:
When the recording medium processing for processing so that a predetermined process can be performed as the score is not performed, the game points stored in the game point storage means are divided into a plurality of times and converted into the score A plurality of conversion request transmitting means (FIG. 11) for transmitting a conversion request for performing a plurality of times;
Batch conversion request transmission means (FIG. 13) for transmitting once a conversion request for converting the game points stored in the game point storage means into batch points when the recording medium processing is being performed; including.

  According to the above configuration, when the recording medium process is not performed, the game points can be converted into points in a plurality of times, while when the recording medium process is performed, the game points can be converted into batch points. It is possible to shorten the point conversion time.

(9-1) The present invention is a gaming system comprising a gaming machine (P 2 and S 2S) and a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine,
The gaming device is:
A first control means (SC325b) and a second control means (communication control IC 325a) capable of communicating with each other;
Mutual authentication means (communication control IC authentication sequence in FIG. 29) for performing mutual authentication between the first control means and the second control means;
On the condition that the authentication result by the mutual authentication means is appropriate, identification information (main chip ID and payout control chip ID) for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine is received from the gaming machine and based on the identification information Gaming machine identification information authentication means (gaming machine chip information authentication sequence of FIG. 29) for performing processing for authenticating the authenticity of the gaming machine,
Communication key generation means for generating a communication key used for encrypted communication between the first control means and the second control means after the processing for authentication by the gaming machine identification information authentication means is executed (Generate communication key for game machine business message in FIG. 29),
The first control means and the second control means perform cryptographic communication using the communication key generated by the communication key generation means (the communication key generated by the communication control IC 325a is transmitted to the SC 325b, and between them. Cryptographic communication is performed using this communication key).

  According to the above configuration, the generation of the communication key used for the encryption communication between the first control unit and the second control unit is an appropriate result by mutual authentication between the first control unit and the second control unit. Even if the communication key is leaked at the time of encryption communication, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as misusing the key and scrambling the mutual authentication monitoring, and this is a security vulnerability. Sex can be overcome as much as possible. In addition, the communication key is prevented from being generated without receiving any identification information for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine from the gaming machine and authenticating the authenticity of the gaming machine based on the identification information. can do.

(9-2) Another aspect of the present invention is a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on gaming machines (P 2 and S 2S),
A first control means (SC325b) and a second control means (communication control IC 325a) capable of communicating with each other;
Mutual authentication means (communication control IC authentication sequence in FIG. 29) for performing mutual authentication between the first control means and the second control means;
On the condition that the authentication result by the mutual authentication means is appropriate, identification information (main chip ID and payout control chip ID) for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine is received from the gaming machine and based on the identification information Gaming machine identification information authentication means (gaming machine chip information authentication sequence of FIG. 29) for performing processing for authenticating the authenticity of the gaming machine,
Communication key generation means for generating a communication key used for encrypted communication between the first control means and the second control means after the processing for authentication by the gaming machine identification information authentication means is executed (Generate communication key for game machine business message in FIG. 29),
The first control means and the second control means perform cryptographic communication using the communication key generated by the communication key generation means (the communication key generated by the communication control IC 325a is transmitted to the SC 325b, and between them. Cryptographic communication is performed using this communication key).

  According to the above configuration, the generation of the communication key used for the encryption communication between the first control unit and the second control unit is an appropriate result by mutual authentication between the first control unit and the second control unit. Even if the communication key is leaked at the time of encryption communication, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as misusing the key and scrambling the mutual authentication monitoring, and this is a security vulnerability. Sex can be overcome as much as possible. In addition, the communication key is prevented from being generated without receiving any identification information for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine from the gaming machine and authenticating the authenticity of the gaming machine based on the identification information. can do.

(9-3) In the gaming system (9-1) or the gaming device (9-2),
The gaming apparatus has setting means for performing communication activation information setting processing for setting communication activation information (valid key) for enabling communication between the second control means and the gaming machine (FIG. 29). Security information update sequence)
The communication key generation means performs encrypted communication between the first control means and the second control means after the processing for authentication is executed and the communication activation information setting processing is executed. A communication key to be used is generated (FIG. 29).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that a communication key is generated even though communication between the second control means and the gaming machine is not activated.

(9-4) In the gaming system (9-1) or (9-3) or the gaming device (9-2) or (9-3) above,
The communication key generation means executes a repeated generation process for newly generating the communication key every predetermined period (control to update the communication key for game machine business message when the SC 325b detects the update period of the communication key The iterative generation process generates a communication key using change data that can be changed between the previous communication key generation and the current communication key generation (communication using current time data and random numbers). Generate a key).

  According to the above configuration, the iterative generation process for newly generating a communication key every predetermined period is performed by using the change data that can change between the generation of the previous communication key and the generation of the current communication key. Therefore, even if the communication key is once leaked, a new communication key is generated using changeable change data different from that at the time of generation of the leaked communication key, and the new communication is performed. Since encryption communication is performed using a key, even if an attempt is made to decrypt communication using the new communication key with a leaked key, decryption cannot be performed, and security can be improved.

(10-1) The present invention is a gaming system including first control means (SC325b) and second control means (communication control IC 325a) connected to be communicable with the first control means,
First mutual authentication processing means (FIGS. 30 and 32) that generates an authentication key used for mutual authentication between the first control means and the second control means and performs a first mutual authentication process using the authentication key. : The first authentication sequence and the second authentication sequence are performed using the authentication key immediately after the update (this authentication key)),
Operation processing means (FIG. 29, FIG. 30: first authentication sequence) for executing operation processing by the first control means and the second control means when the authentication result by the first mutual authentication processing is appropriate. When the authentication result by the communication control IC authentication sequence including the second authentication sequence is appropriate, business message communication with the gaming machine is possible)
When the authentication result by the first mutual authentication process is inappropriate (FIG. 32: when the authentication result by the sequence of the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is inappropriate), the first control unit and the second Second mutual authentication processing means for performing second mutual authentication processing using the authentication key stored in the control means from the manufacturing stage (FIG. 32: first authentication sequence and second authentication sequence using temporary authentication key) And)
The operation processing unit executes a limited operation process by the first control unit and the second control unit when an authentication result by the second mutual authentication process is appropriate (timed operation with a limited time limit). Process).

  According to the above configuration, when the authentication result by the first mutual authentication process for generating the authentication key and performing the mutual authentication between the first control means and the second control means is inappropriate, the first control means When the second mutual authentication process is performed with the second control means using the authentication key stored from the manufacturing stage, and the authentication result by the second mutual authentication process is appropriate, the first control means and the second control Since the limited operation process by means is executed, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the operation process cannot be performed at all when the authentication result by the first authentication process is inappropriate. In addition, when the authentication result of the first mutual authentication process is inappropriate, the operation process is not allowed to be executed indefinitely, but is limited to the limited operation process. It is also possible to prevent the inconvenience that is performed.

(10-2) Another aspect of the present invention is a game control device including first control means (SC325b) and second control means (communication control IC 325a) connected to be communicable with the first control means. Because
First mutual authentication processing means (FIGS. 30 and 32) that generates an authentication key used for mutual authentication between the first control means and the second control means and performs a first mutual authentication process using the authentication key. : The first authentication sequence and the second authentication sequence are performed using the authentication key immediately after the update (this authentication key)),
Operation processing means (FIG. 29, FIG. 30: first authentication sequence) for executing operation processing by the first control means and the second control means when the authentication result by the first mutual authentication processing is appropriate. When the authentication result by the communication control IC authentication sequence including the second authentication sequence is appropriate, business message communication with the gaming machine is possible)
When the authentication result by the first mutual authentication process is inappropriate (FIG. 32: when the authentication result by the sequence of the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is inappropriate), the first control unit and the second Second mutual authentication processing means for performing second mutual authentication processing using the authentication key stored in the control means from the manufacturing stage (FIG. 32: first authentication sequence and second authentication sequence using temporary authentication key) And)
The operation processing unit executes a limited operation process by the first control unit and the second control unit when an authentication result by the second mutual authentication process is appropriate (timed operation with a limited time limit). Process).

  According to the above configuration, when the authentication result by the first mutual authentication process for generating the authentication key and performing the mutual authentication between the first control means and the second control means is inappropriate, the first control means When the second mutual authentication process is performed with the second control means using the authentication key stored from the manufacturing stage, and the authentication result by the second mutual authentication process is appropriate, the first control means and the second control Since the limited operation process by means is executed, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the operation process cannot be performed at all when the authentication result by the first authentication process is inappropriate. In addition, when the authentication result of the first mutual authentication process is inappropriate, the operation process is not allowed to be executed indefinitely, but is limited to the limited operation process. It is also possible to prevent the inconvenience that is performed.

(10-3) In the game system of (10-1) or the game control device of (10-2),
When the authentication result by the first mutual authentication process is inappropriate, an abnormality notification means for sending a notification that an abnormality has occurred to the management server (FIG. 32: “Authentication key update abnormality” alarm is sent to the key management center. Is further provided.

  According to the above configuration, the management server can grasp that the authentication result by the first mutual authentication process is inappropriate.

(10-4) In the game system of (10-1) and (10-3) or the game control device of (10-2) and (10-3),
The operation processing means executes the operation processing only within a predetermined period (for example, two days) as the limited operation processing.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation process is executed only within a predetermined period as the limited operation process, the operation process in an unstable state where the authentication result of the first authentication process is inappropriate. It is possible to reduce the security problem caused by allowing the password indefinitely.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

Claims (2)

A gaming system comprising a gaming machine and a gaming device that enables gaming on the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Information transmitting means for transmitting game specifying information for specifying game information that changes when a game is performed to the gaming device;
Game specifying information storage means for storing pre-transmission game specifying information which is game specifying information before transmission to the gaming device and storing transmitted game specifying information which is game specifying information transmitted to the gaming device. Including
The gaming device is:
Information storage means for storing the game information;
Information updating means for updating the information stored in the information storage means based on the game specifying information transmitted from the information transmitting means,
The information transmitting means is configured to store the pre-transmission game specifying information and the transmission stored in the game specifying information storage means at the time of communication recovery after recovering from an incommunicable state where the gaming machine and the gaming device cannot communicate with each other. Game-specific information distinction transmitting means for transmitting the game-specific information in a manner that the gaming device can distinguish,
The gaming device is:
Based on the pre-transmission game identification information, the transmitted game identification information, and the information stored in the information storage means transmitted by the game identification information distinction transmission means, the pre-transmission game identification information and the transmitted Suitability determining means for determining whether or not the game specifying information is appropriate information;
And a matching means for matching the gaming machine with game information based on the pre-transmission game specifying information and the transmitted game specifying information, on condition that the appropriateness determining means determines that the game is appropriate. Including gaming system. A gaming device that enables gaming on a gaming machine,
Information storage means for storing game information that changes when a game is played on the gaming machine;
Information receiving means for receiving game specifying information for specifying the game information from the gaming machine;
Information updating means for updating the information stored in the information storage means based on the game specifying information received by the information receiving means,
The information receiving means includes pre-transmission game identification information and the pre-transmission game identification information transmitted from the gaming machine as the game identification information at the time of communication recovery after recovering from an incommunicable state where communication with the gaming machine is impossible. Game identification information distinction receiving means for receiving in a manner capable of distinguishing from transmitted game identification information which is the game identification information one time before,
The gaming device is:
Based on the pre-transmission game specific information received by the game specific information distinction receiving means, the transmitted game specific information, and the information stored in the information storage means, the pre-transmission game specific information and the transmitted game. Suitability determination means for determining whether or not the specific information is appropriate information;
And a matching means for matching the gaming machine with game information based on the pre-transmission game specifying information and the transmitted game specifying information, on condition that the appropriateness determining means determines that the game is appropriate. Including a gaming device.

Images